2008 RamChassis 1st

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509 10
INTRODUCTION 1
CONTENTS
m Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 m Van Conversions/Campers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
m A Message From DaimlerChrysler Corporation – m Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Diesel Engines Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
m Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
m How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
m Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION A MESSAGE FROM DAIMLERCHRYSLER

This manual has been prepared with the assistance of CORPORATION – DIESEL ENGINES ONLY
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with DaimlerChrysler Corporation and Cummins welcome
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is you as a new Dodge Ram Cummins Turbo Diesel-
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and powered truck owner.
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
Almost 100% of the heavy duty trucks in the United
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
States and Canada are diesel powered because of the fuel
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
economy, rugged durability, and high torque which per-
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
mits pulling heavy loads. Cummins engines power well
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored over half of these trucks. Now this same technology and
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with proven performance is yours in your new Dodge Ram
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be truck equipped with the Cummins 6.7 liter, Turbo-
aware of all safety warnings. charged, Charge Air Cooled, Diesel engine.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer Your diesel truck will sound, feel, drive, and operate
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni- differently from a gasoline-powered truck. It is important
cians and genuine Mopart parts, and is interested in that you read and understand this manual. You may find
your satisfaction. that some of the starting, operating, and maintenance
procedures are different. However, they are simple to
INTRODUCTION 5
follow and careful adherence to them will ensure that The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
you take full advantage of the features of this engine. complete listing of all subjects. 1
Thank you for choosing the Dodge Ram truck with Consult the following table for a description of the
Cummins Turbo Diesel power. symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
6 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS Operating instructions for the special equipment in-
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should 1
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures are missing, please contact your selling dealer for assis-
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do tance in obtaining replacement documents from the
not read this entire manual you may miss important applicable manufacturer.
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
For information on the Body Builders Guide go to:
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS www.dodgebodybuilder.com. This website contains di-
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body mensional and technical specifications for Dodge trucks.
modifications or special equipment installed by van It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical
conversion/camper manufacturers/ body builders. See support. For service issues, contact your Dodge dealer.
the Warranty information book, Section 2.1.C. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufac-
turer.
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
the windshield. This number also appears on the Auto-
mobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window WARNING!
on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Vehicle Identification Number

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
m A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Locking Doors With The Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock
m Sentry Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
m Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Set The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
m Steering Wheel Lock — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
m Illuminated Entry System — If Equipped . . . . . . .20
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
m Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ Power Sliding Rear Window – If Equipped . . . .34
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ Sliding Rear Window – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .34
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 m Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 ▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . .43
m Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Automatic Locking Restraint (ALR) Mode –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
m Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Manual Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
(BeltAlert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
m Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Power Windows – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental m Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

Restraint System (SRS)—Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Lock Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 2
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
m New Engine Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ 5.7L Gas Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ 6.7L Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal

The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
the LOCK position, and remove the key.
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Ignition Switch Positions
Ignition Key
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the programmable. For details, refer to “KEY OFF POWER
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a DELAY > OFF” under “Personal Settings (Customer 2
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual.
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service. WARNING!
NOTE: For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the power window children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
switches, radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
power outlets will remain active for 10 minutes after the ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition switch is turned off. Opening either front door ignition. A child could operate power windows,
will cancel this feature. other controls, or move the vehicle.
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC), the power window switches,
radio, hands–free system (if equipped), and power out-
lets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always

remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped

When the steering wheel is in the LOCK position, the
steering and ignition systems are locked to provide
antitheft protection for your vehicle. It may be difficult to
turn the key from the LOCK position when starting your
vehicle. Move the steering wheel left and right while Ignition Key Release Button
turning the key until it turns easily. To remove the key, Locking Doors With The Key
depress and hold the release button located between the You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
ignition switch and the instrument panel. Turn the igni- door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
tion key to LOCK and remove the key. key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
lubrication.
SENTRY KEY turn on for three (3) seconds for a bulb check. If the light
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho- remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that 2
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked someone used an invalid key to start the engine. Either of
or unlocked. these conditions will result in the engine being shut off
after two (2) seconds.
The system uses ignition keys, which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder), to prevent unauthorized If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are pro- during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two (2) the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle ser-
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the viced as soon as possible.
engine.
NOTE:
NOTE: A key, which has not been programmed, is also • The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the with some after-market remote starting systems. Use
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle. of these systems may result in vehicle starting prob-
lems and loss of security protection.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will
• Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or

CAUTION!
any other transponder-equipped components on the
same key chain will not cause a key-related (transpon- Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and
der) fault unless the additional part is physically held lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
will not cause interference with this system. At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have with a four-digit PIN number. Keep the PIN in a secure
been programmed to the vehicle electronics. location. This number is required for dealer replacement
of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an
Replacement Keys authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro-
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle gramming procedure. This procedure consists of pro-
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank
Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot key is one, which has never been programmed.
be programmed to any other vehicle. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
Customer Key Programming 4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch. Turn
If you have two valid sentry keys, you can program new the ignition switch to the “ON” position within 60
sentry keys to the system by performing the following seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. In
procedure: addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will 2
stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete,
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
the indicator light will turn on again for 3 seconds and
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
then turn off.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn The new Sentry Key is programmed. The Keyless Entry
the ignition switch to the “ON” position for at least 3 Transmitter will also be programmed during this pro-
seconds, but no longer than 15-seconds. Then, turn the cedure.
ignition switch to the “LOCK” position and remove the
Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys. If you do
first key.
not have a programmed sentry key, contact your dealer
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch. for details.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position within 15 NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your dealer to
seconds. After ten seconds, a chime will sound. In have all remaining keys erased from the systems
addition, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” vehicle. The remaining keys must then be repro-
position and remove the second key. grammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to the dealer at
the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering

The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 Wheel:
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
subject to the following conditions: down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
engages.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:
received, including interference that may cause undes-
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
ired operation.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED the right or left to disengage the lock.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with- the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
out the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved no disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
more than 1/2 turn in either direction and the key is not the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System Rearming of the System:

This system prevents the key from being removed unless The security system will rearm itself after the 15 addi-
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of tional minutes of headlights and security telltale flashing,
PARK unless the key is in the ON positions, and the if the system has not been disabled. If the condition 2
brake pedal is depressed. which initiated the alarm is still present, the system will
ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED and ignition.
This system monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for
unauthorized operation. When the alarm is activated, the To Set the Alarm:
system provides both audible and visual signals. For the The alarm will set when you use the power door locks, or
first 3 minutes the horn will sound and the headlights use the Keyless Entry transmitter to lock the doors. After
and security telltale will flash repeatedly. For an addi- all the doors are locked and closed the SECURITY light in
tional 15 minutes only the headlights and security telltale the instrument cluster will flash rapidly to signal that the
will flash. The engine will run only if a valid Sentry Key system is arming. The security light in the instrument
is used to start the vehicle. Use of the Sentry Key will panel cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to
disable the alarm. indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set,
the security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate
that the system is armed.
NOTE: If the SECURITY light stays on continuously vehicle and lock the doors with the transmitter, the alarm
during vehicle operation, have the system checked by will sound when you pull the door handle to exit. The
your dealer. door will be locked but the Security Alarm will not arm.
To Disarm the System:
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Use the Keyless Entry transmitter to unlock the door. If The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the keyless
something has triggered the system in your absence, the entry transmitter or open the doors. This feature is only
horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors available if you have Remote Keyless Entry.
and the security lamp will flash for 30 seconds. Check the
vehicle for tampering. The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
The Security system will also disarm, if the vehicle is will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
started with a programmed Sentry Key. If an unpro- turned on.
grammed Sentry Key is used to start a vehicle, the engine NOTE:
will run for 2 seconds and then the security alarm will be • The front courtesy overhead console, door courtesy
initiated. To exit alarming mode, press the transmitter lights do not turn off if the dimmer control is in the
Unlock button, or start the vehicle with a programmed interior lights ON position (extreme top position).
Sentry Key.
• The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
The Security Alarm System is designed to protect your dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the downward position).
system will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED To unlock the doors:

Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors. When the UNLOCK button is pressed, the 2
illuminated entry will initiate, the parking lights will
flash on twice and if installed, the cargo lamp will turn on
for 30 seconds.
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors or
drivers door only upon the first UNLOCK button press
by using the following procedure:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Three Button Transmitter Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors from grammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
distances up to about 23 feet (7 meters) using a hand held formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual
radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at for details.
the vehicle to activate the system. • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the • For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
vehicle. Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
2. Press and hold the LOCK button on your key.
grammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
3. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds, formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual
but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the for details.
UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
4. Release both buttons at the same time. following procedure:
5. This will enable you to unlock all doors on the first The horn chirp feature will be shipped from the assembly
press of the UNLOCK button. plants activated. If desired this feature can be disabled by
using the following procedure:
6. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
To lock the doors:
vehicle.
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. If the ignition is OFF, when the doors are 2. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
locked, the parking lights will flash on once and the horn (i.e. functional) key fob.
will chirp once.
3. Continue to hold the LOCK button, wait at least 4 • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and following procedure:
hold the PANIC button. Release both buttons at the same
1. Perform this operation while standing outside the
time.
vehicle.
2
2. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with (i.e. functional) key fob.
the park lamp flash feature activated. If desired, this
3. Continue to hold the UNLOCK button, wait at least 4
feature can be disabled by using the following procedure:
seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds, then press and
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle hold the LOCK button. Release both buttons at the same
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key time.
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Pro-
grammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual
for details.
Using the Panic Alarm General Information

To activate the Panic mode while the ignition is OFF press This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
and release the PANIC button on the transmitter once. RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
When the Panic mode is activated, the interior lights will following conditions:
illuminate, the headlamps and parking lights will flash,
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
and the horn will sound.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
To cancel the Panic mode press and release the PANIC
received including interference that may cause undesired
button on the transmitter a second time, after 5 seconds.
operation.
Panic mode will automatically cancel after 3 minutes or if
the vehicle is started and exceeds 15 mph. During the NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
Panic Mode, the door locks and remote keyless entry proved by the party responsible for compliance could
systems will function normally. Panic mode will not void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
disarm the security system on vehicles so equipped. If your Keyless Entry Transmitter fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of the
batteries is from one to two years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Transmitter Battery Service NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, remove the
small screw, and separate the two halves of the transmit-
2
ter. Make sure not to damage the rubber gasket during
removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on battery to the + sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on back cover. Avoid
touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may
cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
3. To reassemble the transmitter case, snap the two
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may halves of the case together. Make sure there is an even
apply, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. “gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install and
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 bat- tighten the screw until snug. Test transmitter operation.
tery.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a remote starting
system, which will allow the vehicle to be started from
distances up to approximately 300 feet away from the
vehicle using the remote keyless entry key fob which is
part of your ignition key.
In order to remote start your vehicle, the hood, and all the
doors must be closed.
To remote start your vehicle, press the REMOTE START
button on the key fob twice within three seconds. To
indicate that the vehicle is about to start, the parking Remote Start Transmitter
lights will flash and the horn will sound briefly.
Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15
minutes. To cancel remote start, press the REMOTE
START button once.
The parking lamps will remain illuminated to indicate
that the vehicle has remote started and the engine is
running. The lamps will turn off when the ignition is
turned to RUN or the remote start is cancelled.
To enter the vehicle while the engine is running during a The vehicle can be started remotely up to a maximum of
remote start, you must first unlock the vehicle using the two times. The vehicle is also allowed a maximum of one
UNLOCK button on the key fob. After the vehicle is failed start, where the remote start sequence was initiated
unlocked, you have 15 minutes to enter the vehicle, insert but the engine stopped cranking without starting. After 2
the key in the Ignition and move it to the RUN position, either of these conditions, or if the Vehicle Theft Alarm is
otherwise the engine will cancel remote start and auto- alarming, or if the PANIC button was pressed, the vehicle
matically turn off. must be reset by inserting a valid key into the ignition
and moving it to the RUN position, then back to LOCK.
Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
• If the engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 DOOR LOCKS
• Any engine warning lamps come on Manual Door Locks — If Equipped

Front and Rear doors may be locked, by moving the lock
• The hood is opened plunger up or down.
• The hazard switch is pressed All doors may be opened with the inside door handle
• The transmission is moved out of park without lifting the lock plunger. Doors locked before
closing will remain locked when closed.
• The brake pedal is pressed.
The ignition key will unlock all the locks on your vehicle.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an

accident, lock the vehicle doors when you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switch Location
If you press the power door lock switch while the key is
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
tally locking your keys in the vehicle. Removing the key
or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A
chime will sound if the key is in the ignition switch and
a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key.
Automatic Door Locks – If Equipped 2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seat belt will
If this feature is enabled, your door locks will lock cancel any chiming that may confuse you during this
automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph. programming procedure).
Automatic Door Lock Programming 3. Place the key into the ignition.
2
This feature is enabled when your vehicle is shipped
4. Within 15 seconds cycle the key from the LOCK
from the assembly plant and can be disabled by using the
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
following procedure:
times; ending in the LOCK position (do not start the
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle engine).
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Elec-
in the LOCK direction.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 3
of this manual for details. 6. A single chime will be heard to indicate the feature has
been disabled.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing
the following procedure: 7. To reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors. 8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
before the feature could be disabled. If necessary, repeat
the above procedure.
Auto Unlock On Exit — If Equipped 2. Fasten your seat belt (fastening the seat belt will cancel
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when any chimes that may be confusing during this program-
any door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle ming procedure).
has been shifted into the Park position after the vehicle 3. Insert the key into the ignition.
has been driven (shifted out of Park and all doors closed).
4. Within 15 seconds, cycle the key from the LOCK
This feature will not operate if there is any manual
position to the ON/RUN position a minimum of four
operation of the power door locks (Lock or Unlock).
times ending in the LOCK position (do not start the
Auto Unlock On Exit Programming — If Equipped engine).
Customer Programming sequence to enable or disable
5. Within 30 seconds, press the driver’s door lock switch
the Auto Unlock Feature:
in the UNLOCK direction.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings 6. A single chime will sound to indicate the feature has
(Customer Programmable Features)” under “Elec- been changed.
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 3 7. Repeat the above steps to alternate the availability of
of this manual for details. this feature.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, performing 8. If a chime is not heard, program mode was canceled
the following procedure: before the feature could be changed. If necessary repeat
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors. the above procedure.
Child Protection Door Lock To use the system, open each rear door, slide the lever UP
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the to engage the locks and DOWN to disengage the child-
rear seat, the rear doors of your vehicle have the child- protection locks. When the system on a door is engaged,
protection door lock system. that door can only be opened by using the outside door 2
handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked
position.
Child Protection Door Lock Location
Child Lock Control

WINDOWS
WARNING!
Power Windows – If Equipped
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: After setting the child protection door lock

system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle. Power Window Switches
The control on the left front door panel has up-down
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control
and on the rear doors of Quad Cab and Mega Cab Window Lockout Switch (4 Door Models Only)
models. The windows will operate only when the igni- The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
tion switch is turned to the ON or ACC (Accessory) you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
position. disable the window controls on the other doors, press the 2
window lock button. To enable the window controls,
WARNING! press the window control button again.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Auto Down (Driver’s Side Only)

The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.
Press the window switch past the detent, release, and the
window will go down automatically. Window Lockout Switch
Power Sliding Rear Window – If Equipped Sliding Rear Window – If Equipped

A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down or partially open positions. This is a
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting
occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and
rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch
The power sliding rear window switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls. Press the
right side of the switch to open the glass and the left side
of the switch to close the glass.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
Some of the most important safety features in your on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front far away from home or on your own street. 2
airbags for both the driver and front passenger. If you
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that
will be carrying children too small for adult-size belts,
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision.
your seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child
restraint systems. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
be belted at all times.
WARNING! Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab front center
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts.
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
buckled up properly.
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock

WARNING!
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out. • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
WARNING! your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
injured or killed.
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. sengers safe, too.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and • Two people should never be belted into a single
using a seat belt properly. seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
1 — Latch Plate
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

WARNING!
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect
you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a
sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing
the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. And a belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force
Latch Plate To Buckle in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from
injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt.
The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

WARNING!
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be 2
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision. at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Standard Cab Front Center Three Point Belt
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
1. The front center seat belt on the Standard Cab may be
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas
allow the belt to retract fully.
behind the front seats. The black latch plate can be
detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on
WARNING!
the inboard side of the passenger seat. Insert the vehicle
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and ignition key into the center white slot on the black buckle.
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system The black buckle latch plate can be removed when the
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. key is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor to take
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do up the surplus webbing, and the buckles will hang
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt vertically from the cab back exit bezel, thus freeing up all
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they the area behind the front seats.
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the airbag deployed.
WARNING!
• If the black latch and black buckle are not prop-

erly connected when the seat belt is used by an 2
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
• When reattaching the black latch and black
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and
Detaching Buckle with Key black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
2. To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat, pull the black latch and black buckle.
the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back
panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there
is an audible click. Refer to the previous section for the
proper seat belt usage.
Inserting Latch Plate In Use Position
WARNING!
If the black latch and buckle are not connected when

the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not restrain you properly.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
away from your neck. Press the button located on the anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that 2
upper belt guide, and then move it up or down to the it is locked in position.
position that serves you best.
Automatic Locking Restraint (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode is avail-
able on all passenger seating positions with a combina-
tion lap/shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Anytime a child safety seat is installed in a passenger
seating position. Children 12 years old and under should
be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Center Lap Belts

The center seating position for the Quad Cab front seat
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
has a lap belt only. To fasten the lap belt, slide the latch
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until plate into the buckle until you hear a 9click.9 To lengthen
the entire belt is extracted. the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack,
pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
against the hips. Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
the belt as tightly as is comfortable.
now in the automatic locking mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode WARNING!
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
it to retract completely to disengage the automatic lock- • A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous.
ing mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) • A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down
locking mode. and under the belt in a collision.
• A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash
forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip
bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries is
greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug.
Seat Belt Pretensioners Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System

The seat belts for both front seating positions are (BeltAlert)
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
remove slack from the seat belt system in the event of a seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is 2
collision. These devices improve the performance of the greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
size occupants, including those in child restraints. buckle their seat belts. If the driver unbuckles the seat
belt while the vehicle is in motion an immediate chime
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
will be heard and, the Enhanced Warning System
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
(BeltAlert) will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat
The pretensioners are triggered by the airbag control belt is buckled. The Enhanced Warning System
module. Like the airbags, the pretensioners are single use (BeltAlert) will be reactivated if the ignition is cycled,
items. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds
the airbags and pretensioners, both must be replaced. and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en- 3. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by and then re-buckle the driver’s seat belt at least three
following these steps: times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt
buckled.
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON 4. Turn off the engine. A single chime will sound to
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom- signify that you have successfully completed the pro-
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System gramming.
(BeltAlert).
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
1. With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any vated by repeating this procedure.
position except On or Start, buckle the driver’s seat belt.
NOTE: Although the Enhanced Warning System
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait (BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off. Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled.
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women

WARNING!
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
the best way to keep the baby safe. increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the 2
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
across the thighs and as snug against the hips as possible. enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the recommended seating positions. Remove and store
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the extender when not needed.
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental
If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended, your Restraint System (SRS)—Airbag
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This This vehicle may have front airbags for both the driver
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not and front passenger (if equipped) as a supplement to the
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex- seat belt restraint systems. The driver’s front airbag is
tender and store it. mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passen-
ger’s front airbag (if equipped) is mounted in the instru-
ment panel, above the glove compartment. The words
SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers.
These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations

WARNING!
that allow less forceful deployments.
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are not there to protect you.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflat-
ing.
• Do not mount any aftermarket equipment such as
trailer brake controllers, snowplow controllers,
auxiliary light switches, radios, etc. on or behind
the knee bolster. Knee bolsters are designed to
This vehicle may also be equipped without a passenger work with the air bag and seat belt to protect you.
side airbag. In this case the passenger side airbag will be Mounting any additional equipment on or behind
replaced with a storage bin. the knee bolster can cause injury during a crash.
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along airbag unless the airbag is turned off (Standard Cab
with the seatbelts, front airbags work with the instrument Vehicles Only). An airbag deployment can cause se-
panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for vere injury or death to infants in that position. See the
the driver and front passenger. Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch (If Equipped) sec- 2
tion.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to • If your vehicle does not have a rear seat, see the
severe frontal collisions. In certain types of collisions, the Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch (If Equipped) sec-
front airbags may be triggered. But even in collisions tion.
where the airbags work, you need the seat belts to keep
• Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
you in the right position for the airbags to protect you
vehicle seat belt (see section on Child Restraints)
properly.
should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or
Here are some simple steps you can follow to minimize belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag. not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat.
• Children 12 years and under should ride buckled up in
Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
a rear seat, if available.
them or under their arm.
• Infants in rear facing child restraints must NEVER
• All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front
• The driver and front passenger seats should be moved Airbag System Components
back as far as practical to allow the airbag room to
The airbag system consists of the following:
inflate.
• Airbag Control Module
WARNING!
• AIRBAG Readiness Light
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more • Driver Airbag
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In • Passenger Airbag (If Equipped)
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all. • Steering Wheel and Column
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags. • Instrument Panel
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument • Crash Sensor

panel during airbag deployment could cause seri- • Interconnecting Wiring
ous injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the • Knee Impact Bolsters
steering wheel or instrument panel. • Passenger Side Frontal Airbag ON/OFF Switch (Stan-
dard Cab Vehicles Only ) (If Equipped)
How The Airbag System Works • The airbag control module also turns on the AIR BAG
light in the instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds when
• The airbag control module determines if a frontal
the ignition is first turned on, then turns the light off.
collision is severe enough to require the airbags to
inflate. • If it detects a malfunction in any part of the
2
system, it turns on the light either momen-
• The airbag control module will not detect roll over, or
tarily or continuously. The instrument clus-
rear collisions.
ter will flash the seat belt indicator if it
• The airbag control module also monitors the readiness detects a fault with the airbag indicator.
of the electronic parts of the system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or RUN positions. WARNING!
These include all of the items listed above except the
knee bolsters, the instrument panel, and the steering Ignoring the AIR BAG light in your instrument panel
wheel and column. If the key is in the 9Off9 position, in could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect you
the ACC position or not in the ignition, the airbags are in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays on
not on and will not inflate after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
• When the airbag control module detects a collision Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch – (Standard Cab
requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A Vehicles Only) (If Equipped)
large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate
the airbags. The airbag covers separate and fold out of
the way as the airbags inflate to their full size. The
airbags fully inflate in milliseconds. This is less time
than it takes you to blink your eyes. The airbags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with passenger side air-
bag). The driver’s front airbag deflates through vents
towards the instrument panel. The passenger’s front
airbag (if equipped) is deflated through vent holes in
the sides of the airbag. In this way the airbags do not
interfere with your control of the vehicle.
• The knee impact bolsters help protect the knees and The passenger front airbag is to be turned off only if the
position you for the best interaction with the front passenger:
airbag. • is an infant (less than 1 year old) who must ride in the
front seat because there is no rear seat, because the rear
seat is too small for a rear-facing infant restraint or
because the infant has a medical condition which

WARNING!
makes it necessary for the driver to be able to see the
infant, Whenever an airbag is turned off, even a lap/
• is a child, age 1 to 12 who must ride in the front seat shoulder belted passenger may hit their head, neck, 2
because there is no rear seat, because there is no rear or chest on the dashboard (instrument panel) or
seat position available, or because the child has a windshield in a crash. This may result in serious
medical condition which makes it necessary for the injury or death.
driver to be able to see the child,
• has a medical condition which makes passenger airbag To Shut Off the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Ve-
(if equipped) inflation (deployment) a greater risk for hicles Only) (If Equipped)
the passenger than the risk of hitting the dashboard
(instrument panel) or windshield in a crash. Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch (if equipped), push the key in and turn clockwise,
and remove the key from the switch. This will shut off the
passenger airbag (if equipped). The “Off” light near the
switch will illuminate when the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position.
To Turn On the Passenger Airbag (Standard Cab Ve- If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
hicles Only) (If Equipped) or all of the following may occur:
Place the ignition key in the Passenger Airbag On/Off • The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
Switch (If Equipped), push the key in and turn counter- sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
clockwise, and remove the key from the switch. This will passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
turn on the passenger airbag (if equipped). The “Off” abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
light near the switch will be off when the ignition switch you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
is turned to the ON position. floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
If A Deployment Occurs
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the air bag
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
control module detects a moderate-to-severe frontal col-
immediately.
lision, and then immediately to deflate.
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
system.
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, Enhanced Accident Response System
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your If the airbags deploy after an impact and the electrical
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc- system remains functional, vehicles equipped with
tions for cleaning. power door locks will unlock automatically. In addition, 2
approximately 10 seconds after the vehicle has stopped
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
moving, the interior lights will light until the ignition
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
switch is turned off.
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another colli-

sion. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Maintaining Your Airbag Systems NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
WARNING!
Airbag Light
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system You will want to have the airbags ready to
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be inflate for your protection in an impact. While
injured because the airbags are not there to protect the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
including adding any kind of badges or stickers to an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right • The airbag light does not come on or flickers during
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame. turned on.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a colli- • The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
sion. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equip- interval.
ment on or behind the knee bolster.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag
driving.
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works
on your vehicle that it has airbags.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine NOTE:

related gauges are not working, the airbag control mod- 1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
ule may also be disabled. The airbags may not be ready sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
to inflate for your protection. Promptly check fuse block tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag 2
for blown fuses. Refer to the label located on the inside of deployment.
the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses. See your
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
dealer if the fuse is good.
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
record up to 5-seconds of specific vehicle data parameters
used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn
(see the following list) in an event data recorder prior to
more about the possible causes of crashes and associated
the moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment,
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
and up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
data during and/or after airbag deployment. EDR data
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may
are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or nearly
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, govern-
deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
ment officials, and professional crash researchers, such as
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by 1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative), with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
the company or its designated representative will first provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for preserved
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be 3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
4. Otherwise required by law
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
databases, such as those maintained by the US govern-
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
the airbag system
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler Corpora- • Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
tion to any third party except when:
• 9Time9 of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable) Child Restraint

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
• Impact acceleration and angle
time — babies and children, too. Every state in the United
• Seatbelt status States and all Canadian provinces require that small 2
children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law,
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
• Engine control status (including engine speed) led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
• Transmission gear selection
the rear seats rather than in the front.
• Cruise control status
• Traction/stability control status
• Tire pressure monitoring system status (if equipped)
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant

WARNING!
carriers and 9convertible9 child seats. Both types of
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force shoulder belt.
required to hold even an infant on your lap can • The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
become so great that you could not hold the child, no vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
matter how strong you are. The child and others could to about 20 lbs (9 kg). 9Convertible9 child seats can be
be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
Infants and Small Children by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
There are different sizes and types of restraints for less than one year old.
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Use the restraint that is • Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
correct for your child: the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag
(if equipped) unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
• Safety experts recommend that children ride deployment could cause severe injury or death to
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least infants in this position.
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who

WARNING!
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible • Improper installation can lead to failure of an
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a 2
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who collision. The child could be badly injured or
are older than one year. These child seats are also held killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt. actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh- • A rearward facing child restraint should only be
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small used in a rear seat, or in the front seat if the
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child passenger’s front airbag is Off. If the airbag is left
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat On, a rearward facing child restraint in the front
cushion while the child’s back is against the seat back, seat may be struck by a deploying passenger
they should use a belt-positioning-booster seat. The airbag (if equipped) which may cause severe or
child and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the fatal injury to the infant.
lap/shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped
with a front shield and are held in the vehicle by the
lap portion.) For further information refer to
www.seatcheck.org.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to
restraint: allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide
the latch plate into the buckle. Then pull on the belt
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
until it is all removed from the retractor. Allow the belt
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
to return to the retractor, pulling on the excess web-
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
bing to tighten the lap portion about the child re-
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
straint. Refer to the 9Automatic Locking Retractors
where you will use it before you buy it.
(ALR) Mode9 earlier in this section.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
weight and height limits.
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
not work when you need it. several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
• The passenger seat belts are equipped with Automatic
Locking Retractors (ALR), which are designed to keep • If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
it is not necessary to use a locking clip. the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure, Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
try a different seating position. age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. LATCH child restraint 2
anchorage systems are installed in the Standard Cab
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
passenger seat position and the Quad Cab rear seat
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the outboard positions. LATCH equipped seating positions
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. feature both lower anchor bars, located at the back of the
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or seat cushion, and tether strap anchorages, located behind
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs the seatback (refer to Child Restraint Tether Anchor later
and cause serious personal injury. in this section).
Identification dots are located above the standard cab
WARNING!
front seat lower anchorages as a guide for locating lower
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant anchors.
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing
an infant or child restraint.
NOTE: For children riding in the front seat of a Stan-

dard Cab model refer to the “Passenger Airbag On/Off
Switch” (If Equipped) located in this section.
Standard Cab Passenger Seat
Quad Cab Rear Outboard Seats

Child restraint systems having attachments designed to NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
to the seatback tether anchorage have been available for of reach of children. It is recommended that before 2
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
older products. reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
ages will continue to have features for installation in
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
your child unattended in the vehicle.
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle. NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belting.
Installing the Child Restraint System with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
WARNING!
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
Do not install child restraint systems equipped with straps and tether straps so that you can more easily attach
LATCH attachments in the center position of a Quad the hook or connector to the lower anchorages and tether
Cab model rear seat. The LATCH anchorages in this anchorages. Then tighten all three straps as you push the
seat are designed for the two outboard seating posi- child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
tions only. A child may be placed in the rear center Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
seating position of a Quad Cab model using the seat have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
belt and child tether anchorage. Failure to follow this tions that come with the child restraint system.
may result in serious or fatal injury.
WARNING!
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many, Improper installation of a child restraint to the
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some when installing an infant or child restraint.
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
Child Restraint Tether Anchor

WARNING!
Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con-
nection to tether anchors have been available for some An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the 2
provide add-on tether strap kits for their older products. seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
Regular Cab models of Ram Pickups have two tether into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
anchorages, one each behind the front center and right even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor
seats. Quad Cab and Mega Cab models have three positions directly behind the child seat to secure a
anchorages, one behind each of the rear seats. child restraint top tether strap. Follow the instruc-
tions below. See your dealer for help if necessary.
Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center

Front Seat (Regular Cab - All Seats)
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether
strap so that it will reach over the seat back under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat.
2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
the square opening in the sheet metal.
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the strap may be retained with an elastic band. Accessibility to
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions. the tether strap is greatly improved by raising the seat
cushion to the “up” position. Remove the elastic before use.
2. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
then to the anchor directly behind the center rear seat.
3. Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint
and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat.
4. Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center
seat, and attach the hooks to the metal ring.
5. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat and
Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence - to the anchor directly behind the right seat.
(Quad Cab Rear Seats) 6. Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the
1. Obtain tether straps by raising the head restraints and tether strap according to the child restraint manufactur-
reaching between the rear glass and rear seat. The tether er’s instructions.
Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab

Tether Anchorage Points at All Three Seating

Positions (Mega Cab)
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under
the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
2. Lift the cover, and attach the hook to the square
opening in the sheet metal.
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Mega Cab Tether Strap Mounting
Children Too Large for Booster Seats NEW ENGINE BREAK-IN

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
5.7L Gas Engine
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
your new vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300
2
seat back should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat. up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While
cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the limits
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
as possible.
Avoid wide open throttle acceleration in low gear.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality, energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
changes should be consistent with the anticipated cli-
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
matic conditions under which vehicle operation will
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
occur. The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
their back.
discussed in Section 7 under Maintenance Procedures,
Engine Oil.
NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS 6.7L Diesel Engine

MUST NEVER BE USED. Your Cummins 24 Valve Turbo Diesel engine does not
require a break-in period due to its construction. Normal
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
operation is allowed, provided the following recommen-
thousand miles of operation. This is a normal part of the
dations are followed:
break-in and is not an indication of difficulty.
NOTE: Light duty operation such as light trailer towing
CAUTION! or no load operation, will extend the time before the
engine is at full efficiency and may effect the performance
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) your new of the vehicle aftertreatment (exhaust) system. Reduced
vehicle is driven, do not tow a trailer. Doing so fuel economy and power may be seen at this time.
may damage your axles, driveline and vehicle.
• Warm up the engine before placing it under load.
• Limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h) during the
first 500 miles (805 km) of towing. • Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged
periods.
• Use the appropriate transmission gear to prevent
engine lugging.
• Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature indica-
tors.
• Check the coolant and oil levels frequently. SAFETY TIPS

• Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carry- Transporting Passengers
ing or towing significant weight. This vehicle is designed to carry passengers in the cab
only. For safety reasons, NEVER TRANSPORT PASSEN-
2
Because of the construction of the Cummins Diesel
GERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
engine, engine run-in is enhanced by loaded operating
conditions which allow the engine parts to achieve final
WARNING!
finish and fit during the first 6,000 miles (10 000 km).
CAUTION! inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) your new
injured or killed.
vehicle is driven, do not tow a trailer. Doing so
may damage your axles, drivetrain and vehicle. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h) during the
first 500 miles (805 km) of towing. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Lock Your Vehicle • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the

Always remove the keys from the ignition and lock all engine running for more than a short period, adjust
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your your climate control system to force outside air into
own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed and the
well-lighted area and never invite theft by leaving ar- controls in any position except OFF or MAX A/C.
ticles of value exposed.
• The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
Exhaust Gas into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine
exhaust system.
WARNING!
Be aware of changes in the sound of the exhaust system;
Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, a potentially exhaust fumes detected inside the vehicle; or damage to
toxic gas that by itself is colorless and odorless. To the underside or rear of the vehicle. Have a competent
avoid inhaling these gases, the following precautions mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adja-
should be observed: cent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
or out of the area. change. Replace or adjust as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Airbag Light

Vehicle The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
Heater Defroster Ducts
Inspect the heater defroster ducts for proper operation.
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your 2
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers or comes
Check for proper air flow through all defroster ducts. If
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
there are any question regarding the operation of your
rized dealer. If there is a problem with the airbag light the
heater defroster ducts, have the system checked by an
seatbelt light will flash.
authorized dealer
Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The
Seat Belts
Vehicle
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced Tires
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Examine tires for tread wear or uneven wear patterns.
Check for stones, nails, glass or other objects lodged in
Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if
the tread.
they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the front airbags have deployed. If there is any Inspect for tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check wheel
question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the nuts for tightness and tires for proper pressure.
belt.
Lights Fluid Leaks

Check the operation of all exterior lights. Check turn Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument water, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if fuel fumes are
panel. detected the cause should be located and corrected.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching and locking.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
m Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 m Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
▫ Inside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
▫ Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror – If Equipped . . . .82
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ UConnect™ System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Electronic Power Mirrors – If Equipped . . . . . .84
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster And Heated
UConnect™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Sideview Mirrors – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors – If Equipped . . . . . . . .85
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
m Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ▫ Daytime Running Lights

▫ 40-20-40 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 (Canada Only And Fleet Vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
▫ Manual Rotary Lumbar Support Adjustment — ▫ Multifunction Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 m Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 ▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
m To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 m Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
m Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 m Driver Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . 131
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 ▫ Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 m Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . . 132
▫ Headlamp Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights . . . . . 124 ▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ▫ Elapsed Time (ET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ▫ C/T Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ▫ Automatic Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 ▫ Manual Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
3
m Overhead Console With Compass/Temperature ▫ Recalibrating The Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Mini-Trip Computer — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Outside Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ US/M Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
m Overhead Console With Electronic Vehicle
▫ Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Information Center (EVIC) — Diesel Only . . . . . 142
▫ Global Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 ▫ Dome/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Step Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Compass/Temperature Button . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
m Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Trip Odometer (ODO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
m Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
m Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 ▫ Center Storage Compartment (Bucket Seats) —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders (40–20–40
Seats) — Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 154 ▫ Storage And Seats (Quad Cab Models) . . . . . . 160
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders ▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
(Bucket Seats) — Automatic Transmission . . . . 155
m Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Manual
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster And Heated
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Side View Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Rear Cupholder (Quad Cab) — If Equipped . . 156
▫ Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . . 162
m Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . . . . . . . 162
▫ Center Storage Compartment (40–20–40 Seat) —
m Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 163
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
MIRRORS
Inside Mirror
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the 3
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Adjusting Rear View Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror – If Equipped

CAUTION!
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
A light in the button will indicate when the dimming Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
feature is activated. mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror

Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature

WARNING!
All 6 x 9 inch exterior mirrors are hinged and may be
Vehicles and other objects seen in a right side convex moved either forward or rearward to resist damage. The
mirror will look smaller and farther away than they hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full
really are. Relying too much on your right side rearward, and normal.
convex mirror could cause you to collide with an- 3
other vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in
the right side convex mirror. Some vehicles will not
have a convex right side mirror.
Electronic Power Mirrors – If Equipped
Power Mirror Switches

Power Mirror Movement Set the top switch to the left or right for the left or right
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the mirror, and set it to the center off position to prevent
driver’s door trim panel. accidentally moving a mirror when you are finished
adjusting the mirror. To adjust a mirror, select left or right
with the top switch, and press one of the four arrows for
the direction you want the mirror to move.
Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated Trailer Towing Mirrors – If Equipped
Sideview Mirrors – If Equipped These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated head to provide a greater vision range when towing
side view mirrors are activated by pressing the extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or out-
heated grid button, located on the Climate Control panel, board, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped Out or
with the ignition On. Turning Off the rear window In). A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main 3
defroster or the ignition will deactivate the Electric Rear mirror surface.
Window Defroster and Heated side view mirrors feature.
These features turn off automatically after 15 minutes
have elapsed for the first activation per ignition cycle.
Each subsequent activation of these features per ignition
cycle will shutoff automatically after 10 minutes have
elapsed. To reactivate, simply press the button again.
NOTE: Fold the 7 x 10 inch trailer towing mirrors

rearward prior to entering an automated car wash.
Trailer Towing Position
Blindspot Mirror
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) — NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
IF EQUIPPED phone equipped with the Bluetooth 9Hands-Free Profile,9
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
NOTE: The sales code RER radio contains an inte-
for supported phones.
grated Hands-Free Communication (UConnect™) sys-
tem. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
UConnect™ system operating instructions for this ra- system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
3
dio. vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
phone for private conversation.
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
voice commands (e.g., 9Call” { “Mike” {”Work9 or 9Dial” separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
{ “248-555-12129). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans- language. This system is driven through your Blue-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
will automatically mute your radio when using the features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
UConnect™ system. that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UCon-
nect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the

vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.
UConnect™ Switches
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-
Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UCon- • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
nect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the voice on beep, which follows the 9Ready9 prompt
the phone manufacturer for details. or another prompt.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the • For certain operations, compound commands can be
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™ used. For example, instead of saying 9Setup9 and then
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume 9Phone Pairing,9 the following compound command
3
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control can be said: 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
(right switch), if so equipped.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from combined form of the voice command is given. You
the UConnect™ system such as 9CELL9 or caller ID on can also break the commands into parts and say each
certain radios. part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
Operations
mand 9Phonebook New Entry,9 or you can break the
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
combined form command into two voice commands:
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
9Phonebook9 and 9New Entry.9 Please remember, the
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
specific command and then guided through the available
sitting eight feet away from you.
options.
Voice Command Tree Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone

Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section. To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
know your options at any prompt, say 9Help9 following phone equipped with the Bluetooth 9Hands-Free Profile,9
the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play all version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
the options at any prompt if you ask for help. for supported phones.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a following vehicle specific websites may also provide
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror. detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say NOTE:
9Cancel9 and you will be returned to the main menu. • www.chrysler.com/uconnect
However, in a few instances the system will take you
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
back to the previous menu.
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System • You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
pairing instructions: priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
9Setup Phone Pairing9 and follow the audible prompts. your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the 3
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
• When prompted, after the voice on beep, say 9Pair a
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
Phone9 and follow the audible prompts.
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
• You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number, phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
which you will later need to enter into your cellular. system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
need to remember this pin number after the initial cellular phone at any time (refer to 9Advanced Phone
pairing process. Connectivity9).
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
Call/Dial by Saying a Number Call/Dial by Saying a Name

• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • Press the “Phone” button to begin.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Dial.9 “Dial” or Call.9
• System will prompt you to say the number you want • System will prompt you to say the name of the person
call. you want call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901.” The phone • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
number that you enter must be of valid length and the name of the person you want to call. For example,
combination. Based on the Country in which the you can say 9John Doe,9 where John Doe is a previ-
vehicle was purchased, the UConnect™ limits the user ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone-
from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For book. Refer to 9Add Names to Your UConnect™
example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long, Phonebook,9 to learn how to store a name in the
which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest phonebook.
valid phone number has ten digits.
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
• The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num- then dial the corresponding phone number, which
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the may appear in the display of certain radios.
display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
NOTE: Adding names to phonebook is recommended
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
when vehicle is not in motion.
main menu.
• Press the “Phone” button to begin.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say names in the phonebook with each name having up to
3
9Phonebook New Entry.9 four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
only in that language.
long names helps the voice recognition and is recom-
mended. For example, say 9Robert Smith9 or 9Robert9 Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
instead of 9Bob.9
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., when vehicle is not in motion.
9Home,9 9Work,9 9Mobile,9 or 9Pager9). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired. • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
9Phonebook Edit.9
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, when vehicle is not in motion.
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
phonebook entry that you are editing.
9Phonebook Delete.9
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
return to the main menu.
entry that you wish to delete or you can say 9List
9Phonebook Edit9 can be used to add another phone Names9 to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
number to a name entry that already exists in the from which you choose. To select one of the entries
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a from the list, press the 9Voice Recognition9 button
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
work number later using the 9Phonebook Edit9 feature. entry and say 9Delete.9
• After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete. • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current 9Phonebook List Names.9
language is deleted. • The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
3
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de- phonebook entries.
leted. Note that only the phonebook in the current • To call one of the names in the list, press the 9Voice
language is deleted. Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook name, and then say 9Call.9 NOTE: the user can also
exercise 9Edit9 or 9Delete9 operations at this point.
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say • The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
9Phonebook Erase All.9 number designation you wish to call.
• The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you • The selected number will be dialed.
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
Phone Call Features Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call

The following features can be accessed through the Currently in Progress
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your If a call is currently in progress and you have another
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
your cellular service provider for the features that you on hold and answer the incoming call.
have.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system compatible phones in
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
Currently in Progress when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the only either answer an incoming call or ignore it.
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
Progress have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
To make a second call while you are currently in a call, time.
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say 9Dial9 or
Conference Call
9Call9 followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
3
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
to 9Toggling Between Calls.9 To combine two calls, refer
joined into one conference call.
to 9Conference Call.9
Three-Way Calling
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni-
To put a call on hold, press the 8Phone’ button until you
tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
phone call as described under 9Making a Second Call
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
while Current Call in Progress.9 After the second call has
8Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
Toggling Between Calls hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), been joined into one conference call.
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
Call Termination Call Continuation

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the 8Phone’ Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
• After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
phone dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
and hold the ‘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
Redial the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
• After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
9Redial.9
which the call is automatically transferred from the
• The UConnect™ system will call the last number that UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ sys-
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
tem.
UConnect™ System Features For command translations and alternate commands in

supported languages, refer to “Command Translations”
Language Selection
at the end of this section.
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using, Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
3
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
the name of the language you wish to switch to
number for your area.
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
language selection.
follows:
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect™ language change op-
9Emergency9 and the UConnect™ system will instruct
eration, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
and usable across all languages.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not 528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
be applicable with the available cellular service and area. for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as compared to that Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
for the cell phone directly. age details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UCon-
nect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature in Paging
emergency situations when the cell phone has network To learn how to page, refer to 9Working with Automated
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™ system. Systems.9 Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
Towing Assistance
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
If you need towing assistance,
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to 9Working
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say with Automated Systems.9
9Towing Assistance.9
Working with Automated Systems if required to enter your pin number followed with a
This method is designed to be used in instances where pound 3 7 4 6 #, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone button and say 93 7 4 6 # Send.9 Saying a number, or
keypad while navigating through an automated tele- sequence of numbers, followed by 9Send9 is also to be
phone system. used to navigate through an automated customer service
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice-
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager. 3
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging Barge In - Overriding Prompts
service or automated customer service. Some services The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
require immediate response selection, in some instances, wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system. recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing 9Would you like to pair a phone, clear
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
a{,9 you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
say 9Pair a Phone9 to select that option without having to
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word 9Send.9 For example,
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™ keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
it). caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
9Setup Confirmations.9 The UConnect™ system will same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
will be given the choice to change it.
dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
Phone and Network Status Indicators vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by may feel that the call did not go through even though the
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
notification to inform you of your phone and network hear the audio.
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming net-
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off) Information Service

When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
able to hear the conversation coming from the other number 9#121,9 you can access voice activated automated
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
order to mute the UConnect™ system: related information.
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button. Advanced Phone Connectivity
3
• After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
9Mute.9 The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
• Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button. ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say 9Transfer Call.9
9Mute-off.9
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the List Paired Cellular Phone Names
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively 9connected9 • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
with one electronic device at a time. “Setup Phone pairing”.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue- • When prompted, say 9List Phones.9
tooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
• The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
manual.
phone being announced, press the 8Voice recognition’
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
lete” a paired phone.
Select another Cellular Phone Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones

This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system • After the 9Ready9 prompt and the following beep, say
that you want to use it with. 9Setup Phone Pairing.9
• Press the ’Phone’ button to begin. • At the next prompt, say 9Delete9 and follow the
3
prompts.
9Setup Select Phone9 and follow the prompts. • You can also press the 8Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
• You can also press the 8Voice Recognition’ button
the phone you wish to delete.
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon-
nect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™ This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
System system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Voice Training To restore the Voice recognition system to factory default
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect procedure and follow the prompts.
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
Voice Recognition (VR)
training mode, follow one of the two procedures: From
outside the UConnect mode (e.g. from radio mode), • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Press and hold the ‘Voice Recognition’ button for 5 • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
seconds until the session begins, or speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
• Press the ‘Voice Recognition’ button and say 9Setup,
Voice Training9 command. • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect System. For best results, the Voice Training • Performance is maximized under:
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
• low-to-medium blower setting,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. • low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise, • Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in

motion is recommended.
• smooth road surface,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
• fully closed windows,
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
• dry weather condition.
• UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is 3
• In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
be compromised with roof top down. name in the phonebook.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking • You can say 9O9 (letter 9O9) for 909 (zero). 98009 must be
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- spoken 9eight-zero-zero.9
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• Even though international dialing for most number
• When navigating through an automated system, such combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of number combinations may not be supported.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say 9send.9
Far End Audio Performance • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
• Audio quality is maximized under:
not the UConnect™ system.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
• low-to-medium vehicle speed, the in-vehicle audio volume.
• low road noise, Bluetooth Communication Link
Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
• smooth road surface,
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this hap-
• fully closed windows, and pens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recom-
• dry weather condition.
mended to remain in Bluetooth 9on9 mode.
• Operation from driver seat.
Power-Up
• In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
be compromised with roof top down. or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
3
3
North American English Call

Primary Alternate(s) Cancel
Zero Confirmation Prompts
One Continue
Two Delete
Three Dial
Four Edit
Five Emergency
Six English
Seven Erase All
Eight Espanol
Nine Francais
Star (*) Help
Plus (+) Home
Pound (#) Language
Add Location List names
All List phones
Mobile Towing assistance

Mute Transfer call
Mute off Try again
New entry Voice training
No Work 3
Pager Yes
Pair a phone General Information
Phone pairing Pairing This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
Phonebook Phone book RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Previous following conditions:
Record again • This device may not cause harmful interference.
Redial
• This device must accept any interference received,
Return to main menu Return. Main menu
including interference that may cause undesired op-
Select phone Select
eration.
Send
Set up Phone settings / Phone
set up
SEATS 40-20-40 Front Seat

The seating options available in this truck are the result of
extensive customer research and evaluations.
Seats are also a primary part of the Occupant Restraint
(protection) System of the vehicle. They need to be used
properly for safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING!

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
injured or killed.
Manual Seat Adjuster
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your As the name implies, the seat is divided into 3 segments.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. The outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and width of the seat. The back of the center portion (20%)
using a seat belt properly. easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage
compartment (if equipped).
Each outboard seat is independently adjustable forward Reclining Seats

or rearward and is equipped with a back recliner. The The recliner handle is on the outside of the seat cushion.
manual forward or rearward seat adjustment handle is Pull up on the handle, as shown, to release the seat back
found at the front edge of each seat cushion. Pull up on and adjust for comfort.
the handle and slide the seat to get the most comfortable
position. 3
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is

dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Recline Lever

To lower the head restraint, push in the button and then

WARNING!
push down on the head restraint.
You can be seriously, even fatally, injured riding in a
seat with the seatback reclined. Do not ride with the
seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no
longer resting against your chest. If you ride in this
position, the shoulder harness will no longer be
restraining you. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and receive serious or fatal injuries.
Recline in a seat only when the vehicle is parked.
Adjustable Head Restraints

Head restraints can reduce the risk of neck injury in the
event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down on Head Restraints
the restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical, at least to the level of the ears.
Manual Rotary Lumbar Support Adjustment — If Power Seats — If Equipped

Equipped
Rotating the lumbar control knob on the left side of the CAUTION!
driver’s seatback and on the right side of the passenger’s
seatback increases or decreases the lumbar (lower back) Don’t put anything under a power seat. It may cause
support. damage to the seat controls. 3
Manual Lumbar Adjustment

Power Seat Switch
control seat height. Change the seat angle by using the

two toggle switches, tilting it up or down.
Up, Down, Forward, and Rearward

The power seat controls are on the outboard side of the
front seat cushions. Three switches control the seat move- Tilt Adjustment
ment. The four-way switch in the center can be moved
forward or backwards to get the most comfortable posi-
tion. The same switch can be moved up and down to
Heated Seats — If Equipped Each heated seat switch has two settings (HI and LOW).
The heated seat switches are located in the instrument Press the switch once to obtain High heat level, then
panel under the climate controls. press the switch again to obtain Low heat level. Pressing
the switch a third time will turn the heated seats OFF. If
you do not purposefully turn the switch OFF, the seat
heating level will automatically change to the next lower 3
level, or OFF. The High heat level operates for 30 minutes
(approximate), the Low heat level operates for 30 min-
utes (approximate). The seat heat will also turn OFF
when the ignition is turned OFF. Both of the indicators
ON identifies High heat level. The lower indicator On
only, identifies Low heat level. Flashing indicator lights
on the switch indicate that the Heated Seat System needs
servicing.
Heated Seat Switches

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat.
Hood Release Lever
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at
the base of the instrument panel. Once the hood is
released you must reach into the opening beneath the
center of the grille and push up the latch to release the
safety catch before raising the hood.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to

WARNING!
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage. If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
Be sure all hood latches are latched fully before
driving. 3
Secondary Latch
LIGHTS Interior Lights
Headlight Switch Location Dimmer Control

Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the
upward detent position, or if equipped, when the UN-
LOCK button is pressed on the key fob. When a door is
open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer Battery Saver
control all the way down to the OFF detent will cause all To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, Load Shed-
the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the ding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
9Party9 mode because it allows the doors to stay open for
If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for 10
extended periods of time without discharging the vehi-
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated upwards for 10
cle’s battery.
minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
3
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
If the headlamps remain on while the ignition is cycled
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after 8
down (dimmer). When the headlights are ON you can
minutes. If the headlamps are turned on and left on for 8
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior lights will
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
automatically turn off.
up until you hear a click. This feature is termed the
“Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are re- NOTE: Battery Saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
quired during the day. ON.
Club Cab/Quad Cab models may have an optional
switched dome lamp that may be operated by pressing
the lens.
Headlamp Delay Headlights, Parking Lights, Panel Lights

To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a When the headlight switch is rotated to the first
headlamp delay that will leave the headlamps on for 90 position, the parking lights, taillights, side marker
seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is lights, license plate light and instrument panel
turned OFF while the headlamp switch is on, and then lights are all turned on. The headlights will turn ON
the headlamp switch is cycled off. Headlamp delay can when the switch is rotated to the second position.
be cancelled by either turning the headlamp switch ON
then OFF or by turning the ignition ON.
The Headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). For details, refer to “Headlamp Off Delay”,
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Fea-
tures),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)” in Section 3 of this manual.
Light Switch Rotation

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight lenses except park. This provides a constant 9Lights ON9 con-
that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage dition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illumi-
than glass headlights. nate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the parking
brake is applied the Daytime Running Lights will turn
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
same side of the vehicle will turn off for the duration of 3
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
Lights-on Reminder
lowed by rinsing.
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel on, after the ignition is turned off, a chime will sound
wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses. when the driver’s door is opened.
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only and Fleet Fog Lights — If Equipped
Vehicles) The foglights are turned ON by placing the head-
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the light rotary control in the parking light or head-
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear light position and pushing in the headlight rotary
control. The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are ON or when the vehicle headlights are ON low
beam. An indicator light located in the instrument cluster You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights partially up or down.
will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time,
when the headlight switch is rotated to the OFF position,
or the high beam is selected.
Multifunction Control Lever
The multifunction control lever is located on the left side
of the steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the lever up or down to signal a right-hand or
left-hand turn.
The arrow on either side of the instrument cluster flashes
to indicate the direction of the turn, and proper operation
Turn Signal Lever
of the front and rear turn signal lights. If a defective bulb
or wiring circuit is detected for the turn signal system, the Turn Signal Auto-Mode
arrow indicators will flash at a faster rate. If an indicator Tap the multi-function control lever once and the turn
fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest signal (left or right) will flash 3 times, and automatically
that the switch or indicator lamp is defective. turn off.
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High Beam / Low Beam Select Switch
3
Pull the multifunction control lever fully toward the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from HIGH or
LOW beam.
High Beam / Low Beam

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Intermittent Wiper System

The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
Windshield Wipers
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the LOW continual speed position. The delay
can be regulated from a maximum of about 15 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every 2 seconds. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km) or less.
Windshield Wiper / Washer Switch

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction control lever. Turn the end of the handle to
select the desired wiper speed.
Windshield Washers
WARNING!
To use the washer, push in on the washer knob on the end
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield of the multifunction control lever and hold while spray is
could lead to an accident. You might not see other desired. If the washer knob is depressed while in the
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the 3
windshield with defroster before and during wind- intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer
shield washer use. knob is pushed, for a period greater than 1 second, while
in the OFF position, the wiper will wipe approximately
three wipes, after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
TILT STEERING COLUMN

WARNING!
To tilt the column, pull rearward on the lever below the
turn signal control and move the wheel up or down, as Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
desired. Push the lever forward to lock the column firmly moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
in place. umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
Tilt Steering Control Lever

DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED Adjustment

1. Position the driver seat so that you are at least 10
inches (254 mm) away from the airbag located in the
center of the steering wheel.
2. Fasten and adjust the seatbelts. 3
3. Move the adjustable pedal switch, located to the left of
the steering column near the parking brake release, in the
direction you desire to move the pedals.
4. The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
R (Reverse) or when the Speed Control is SET.
Adjustable Pedals Switch

The power adjustable accelerator and brake pedals allow
the driver to establish a comfortable position relative to
the steering wheel and pedals.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals

or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

When engaged, this device takes over accelerator opera-
tion at speeds greater than 35 mph (56 km/h). The
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control System has been
controls are mounted on the steering wheel.
designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch
buttons (i.e. SET and CANCEL) are operated simulta-
neously in order to ensure proper operation. The system
can be reactivated by pushing the speed control switch
ON/OFF button and re-establishing the desired vehicle
SET speed.
To Activate
WARNING!
Push the ON/OFF button to the ON position. An indi-
cator light in the instrument cluster illuminates when the Leaving the Speed Control ON when not in use is
system is on. dangerous. You could accidentally set the system to
To Set At A Desired Speed cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press control and have an accident. Always leave the sys- 3
and release the SET button. Release the accelerator and tem OFF when you aren’t using it.
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Deactivate To Resume Speed
A soft tap on the brake pedal, normal braking, clutch To resume a previously set speed, push and release the
pressure while slowing the vehicle, or pressing the CAN- RESUME button. Resume can be used at any speed above
CEL button will deactivate speed control without erasing 30 mph (50 km/h).
the memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button to the OFF
position or turning off the ignition erases the memory. To Vary The Speed Setting
When the speed control is on, speed can be increased by
pressing and holding the ACCEL button. When the
button is released, a new set speed will be established.
Tapping the ACCEL button once will result in a 2 mph SET speed. If the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph (56
(3km/h) speed increase. Each time the button is tapped, km/h), the speed control will automatically disengage. If
speed increases so that tapping the button three times this happens, you can push down on the accelerator
will increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/h), etc. pedal to maintain the desired speed.
Tapping the DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph (2 Vehicles equipped with a 6–speed manual transmission
km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is tapped, should be operated in 4th or 5th gear under the above
speed will decrease. For example, tapping the button 3 conditions.
times will decrease the speed by 3 mph (5 km/h), etc.
WARNING!
To decrease speed while the speed control is on, press
and hold the DECEL button. Release the button when the Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set. can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
To Accelerate For Passing go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
NOTE: When driving uphill, at elevations above 2,000
ft. (610 meters), or when the vehicle is heavily loaded
(especially when towing) the vehicle may slow below the
OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH This overhead console allows you to choose between a
COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER compass/temperature display and one of four trip con-
— IF EQUIPPED ditions being monitored.
This optional overhead console consists of the following:
US/M Button
• Courtesy Lights
3
• Compass/Temperature Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC)
Use this button to change the display from U.S. to metric

measurement units.
RESET Button Global Reset

If the RESET button is pressed twice within 2 seconds
while in any of the 3 resettable displays (AVG ECO,
ODO, ET), the Global Reset will reset all 3 displays.
Step Button
Use this button to reset the following displays:

Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)
Trip Odometer (ODO)
Elapsed time (ET)
Use this button to choose or cycle through the four trip
conditions.
Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) Distance To Empty (DTE)

Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
Average fuel economy is a running average of the the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
amount of fuel used and the distance the vehicle has determined by weighted average of the instantaneous
traveled. and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will momen-
tank level. This is not resettable 3
tarily blank. Then, the history will be erased, and the NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
AVERAGING WILL CONTINUE FROM WHERE IT loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
WAS BEFORE THE RESET. The reset value is based on a the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
minimal amount of fuel used and the distance traveled
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated
from the previous drive cycle. The display may take
driving distance, the DTE display will change to an
several miles for this value to change dependent upon
alternating test display of “LO” and “FUEL”. This dis-
driving habits.
play will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel.
Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will
turn off the “LO FUEL” text and a new DTE value will be
displayed, based on the current values in the DTE
calculation and the current fuel tank level.
NOTE: It is possible for DTE to display “LO FUEL” Trip Odometer (ODO)
before the low fuel warning light turns on in the instru-
NOTE: The maximum value is approximately 6000
ment cluster. This could occur because low fuel warning
miles. Then the trip odometer must be reset in order to
is set to a specified fuel tank volume and DTE is an
update the trip odometer miles.
estimated distance calculation based on fuel economy
and remaining fuel tank volume. This display shows the distance traveled since the last
reset. Resetting of this screen will cause the trip odometer
Ram fuel tank volumes are as follows:
to change to Zero.
• 52 gallons - Standard rear tank
Elapsed Time (ET)
• 22 gallons - Optional Midship Tank This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time
since the last reset. Resetting the Elapsed Time will cause
the display to change to Zero.
C/T Button
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above

32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible per- 3
sonal injury or property damage.
Automatic Compass Calibration

This compass is self-calibrating which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL
Use this button to select a readout of the outside tem- symbol will be displayed.
perature and one of eight compass headings that indicate
After completing up to three 360° turns, with the vehicle
the direction in which the vehicle is facing.
traveling less than 5 mph (8 km/h), in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects, the CAL symbol will turn
off and the compass will function normally.
Manual Compass Calibration

NOTE: To ensure proper compass calibration, make
sure the compass variance is properly set before manu-
ally calibrating the compass.
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL symbol does
not appear, you must manually put the compass into the
“Calibration” mode.
Recalibrating The Compass
Turn on the ignition and set the display to “Compass/
Temperature.” Press and hold the RESET button to
change the display between VAR (compass variance) and
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
CAL (compass calibration) modes. When the CAL sym-
north and geographic north. In some areas of the country,
bol is displayed slowly drive the vehicle 5 mph in a
the difference between magnetic and geographic north is
complete 360° circle in an area free from large metal
great enough to cause the compass to give false readings.
objects or power lines. The CAL symbol will turn off and
If this occurs, the compass variance must be set according
the compass will function normally.
to the Compass Variance Map.
NOTE: The default for the compass variance is zone 8.

To set the variance: Turn the ignition ON and set the
display to “Compass/Temperature.” Press and hold the
RESET button approximately five seconds. The last vari-
ance zone number will be displayed. Press the STEP
button to select the new variance zone and press the
3
RESET button to resume normal operation.
Outside Temperature
Because the ambient temperature sensor is located un-
derhood, engine temperature can influence the displayed
temperature, therefore, temperature readings are slowly
updated when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (30
km/h) or during stop and go driving.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH ELECTRONIC NOTE: The dome/reading lights will remain on until
VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) — the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
DIESEL ONLY been turned off before leaving the vehicle.
The overhead console contains dome/reading lights, and
an Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
Dome/Reading Lights
Located in the overhead console are two dome/reading
lights.
The dome/reading lights illuminate when a door is
opened or when the interior lights are turned on by
rotating the dimmer control located on the Headlight
Switch.
The reading lights are activated by pressing on the
recessed area of the corresponding lens. Dome/Reading Lights
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Trip Functions

Equipped Pressing the STEP button allows you to scroll through
one of the following Trip Function features:
• TRIP – Shows the total distance traveled since the last
reset. To reset the TRIP function, press and hold the
RESET button.
3
• ELAPSED TIME – Shows the total elapsed time of
travel since the last reset. Elapsed time will increment
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or START
positions.
• UNIT IN US/METRIC – Press the RESET button to
toggle between US and METRIC.
Overhead Console with EVIC • AVG. MPG – Shows the average fuel economy since
the last reset. When the fuel economy is reset, the
Pressing the menu button will change the display will show dashes for two seconds. Then the
display to one of the following features: history information will be erased, and the averaging
will continue from the last fuel average reading before
the reset. (Example: If your Electronic Vehicle Informa- change to a text display of 9LOW FUEL.9 This display
tion Center (EVIC) displays 18 AVG. MPG and the will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding
RESET button is pressed, the previous averaging his- a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
tory will be erased and the display will return to the 18 the 9LOW FUEL9 text and a new DTE value will
AVG. MPG, not to 0 AVG. MPG). The display may take display.
several miles for the value to change dependent upon
System Status (EVIC Displays)
driving habits.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
• MI TO EMPTY (Distance To Empty) – Shows the Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel messages:
remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
• TURN SIGNALS ON (with a continuous warning
determined by a weighted average of fuel economy,
chime)
according to the current fuel tank level. MI TO EMPTY
cannot be reset through the RESET button. • PERSONAL SETTINGS NOT AVAILABLE – Vehicle
Not in Park
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of • LEFT/RIGHT FRONT DOOR AJAR (one or more,
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) • LEFT/RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR (one or more, with
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will a single chime if speed is above 1 mph)
• DOOR(S) AJAR (with a single chime if vehicle is in next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
motion) indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
• LOW WASHER FLUID (with a single chime)
your personal driving style.
• OIL CHANGE REQUIRED (with a single chime)
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
• CATALYST FULL SEE OWNER MANUAL time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
3
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
• CATALYST STAT lllllll 90%
release the Menu button. To reset the oil change indicator
• CATALYST FULL SERVICE REQUIRED system (after performing the scheduled maintenance)
refer to the following procedure.
• SERVICE AIR FILTER
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not
• SERVICE CCV FILTER
start the engine).
• COOLANT LOW (with a single chime)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — If Equipped within 10 seconds.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you while in this display to select English, Espanol, or
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not Francais. Then, as you continue, the information will
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure. display in the selected language.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable • “AUTO DOOR LOCKS > YES” – When ON is selected,
Features) all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). To make your
features when the transmission is in PARK. If the trans- selection, press and release the RESET button until
mission is not in PARK the EVIC will display NOT “ON” or “OFF” appears.
AVAILABLE and VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
• “AUTO UNLOCK ON EXIT > YES” – When ON is
Press and release the menu button until the selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is
Personal Settings displays on the EVIC. stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the RESET
Use the STEP button to display one of the following: button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
• “LANGUAGE” – When in this display you may select • “RKE UNLOCK DRV DR 1st” – When DRV DR 1st is
one of three languages for all display nomenclature, selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first
including the trip functions. Press the RESET button press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. When
Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press of the
remote keyless entry unlock button twice to unlock the keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be selected
passenger’s doors. To make your selection, press and with or without the sound horn on lock feature
release the RESET button until “DRV DR 1st ” appears. selected. To make your selection, press and release the
RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
• “RKE UNLOCK ALL DR 1ST” – When All ALL DR
1ST is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first • “HEAD LAMP OFF DELAY > 0 SEC” – When this
press of the remote keyless entry unlock button. To feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the
3
make your selection, press and release the RESET headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
button until “All DR 1st” appears. exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press and
release the RESET button until “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90”
• “SOUND HORN W/LOCK > YES” – When ON is
appears.
selected, a short horn sound will occur when the
remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This • “KEY OFF POWER DELAY > OFF” – When this
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights feature is selected, the power window switches, radio,
on lock/unlock feature. To make your selection, press hands–free system (if equipped), and power outlets
and release the RESET button until “ON” or “OFF” will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
appears. ignition switch is turned off. Opening a vehicle door
will cancel this feature. To make your selection, press
• “FLASH LIGHTS w/LOCK > YES” – When ON is
and release the RESET button until “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5
selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when
min.,” “10 min appears.
the doors are locked or unlocked with the remote
• “ILLUMINATED APRCH > OFF” – When this feature • “COMPASS VARIANCE > 8” – Press the RESET
is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on button to change the compass variance setting. Refer
for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with to Compass Variance, in this section for additional
the remote keyless entry transmitter. To make your information.
selection, press and release the RESET button until
• “COMPASS CALIBRATE > YES” – Press the RESET
“OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
button to calibrate the compass. Refer to Manual
NOTE: If this feature is enabled, the headlamps will be Compass Calibration, in this section for additional
on during the engine pre-heat and cold crank; therefore, information.
it is recommended that the feature be disabled when
Compass/Temperature Button
overnight ambient temperature is at or below 20F (-7C) to
Pressing the Compass/Temperature button
prevent excessive drain on batteries during cold crank-
will return the display to the normal compass/
ing.
temperature display.
• “UNIT IN > US/METRIC” – The EVIC, odometer can
be changed between English and Metric units of NOTE: Temperature accuracy can be effected from heat
measure. To make your selection, press and release the soak. For best accuracy, the vehicle should be driven at a
RESET button until “US” or “METRIC” appears. speed greater than 25 mph (40 km/h) for several min-
utes.
Automatic Compass Calibration 2. Press the menu button until Personal Settings is
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the displayed.
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
3. Press the STEP button until “Calibrate Compass YES”
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
is displayed.
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 4. Press and release the RESET button 3
360° turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
to start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
in the EVIC.
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
5. Slowly drive the vehicle 5 mph in a complete 360°
Manual Compass Calibration
circle (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects)
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
until the “CAL” message turns off. The compass will now
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
function normally.
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
Compass Variance Map

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. There is an additional Power Outlet inside the center
console of vehicles equipped with 40/20/40, or Bucket
2. Press the menu button until Personal Settings is
front seats. There is also a Power Outlet located on the
displayed.
rear of the center console for Quad Cab or Mega Cab
3. Press the STEP button until “Compass Variance” is vehicles (only) equipped with bucket seats.
displayed.
The outlet(s) has/have a fused direct feed from the
3
4. Press and release RESET button until the proper battery so it/they receive power whether the ignition is
variance zone is selected according to the map. ON or OFF.
5. Press and release the compass button to exit. All accessories connected to this/these outlet(s) should
be removed or turned OFF when the vehicle is not in use
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS to protect the battery against discharge.
The auxiliary electrical outlet can provide power for in
cab accessories designed for use with the standard “cigar NOTE: If desired, all of the power outlets can be
lighter” plug. The outlet is located in the instrument converted by your authorized dealer to provide power
panel below and to the right of the Climate Control with the ignition switch in the ON position only.
Panel. A cap is attached to the outlet base indicating
“Power Outlet” 12V-20A.
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER

CAUTION!
The removable ash receiver is located in the instrument
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off panel cup holder tray.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw The cigar lighter is located on the instrument panel,
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in above and to the left of the ash receiver.
use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
As a child safety precaution, the lighter only operates
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
with the ignition switch ON. It heats when pushed in and
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
pops out automatically when ready for use. To preserve
and/or prevent engine starting.
the heating element, do not hold the lighter in the
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers, heating position.
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Ash Tray Automatic Transmission Ash Tray Manual Transmission

CUPHOLDERS
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders (40–20–40
Seats) — Automatic Transmission
Your new Ram truck is equipped with two adjustable
cupholders. The cupholder is opened by pulling on the
cup holder door handle, on the front surface. Each
opening in the cupholder is adjustable and will hold cups
and mugs of various sizes.
To secure the cup, place the cup to be held into one of the
cup wells and then push the cupholder arm toward the
cup until it is held stable.
Cup Holder Door Handle
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders (Bucket

Seats) — Automatic Transmission
If your new Ram truck is equipped with bucket seats
there are three cup holders located on the front of the
center console.
3
Cup Holders Automatic Transmission
Cup Holders Bucket Seat

Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Manual Rear Cupholder (Quad Cab) — If Equipped
Transmission Quad Cab vehicles may be equipped with a rear cup-
holder that consists of two cupwells for rear passenger
convenience.
Cup Holders Manual Transmission

STORAGE removable coin holder (if equipped), and two dividers to

configure the storage area into compartments. For ex-
Center Storage Compartment (40–20–40 Seat) —
ample, compartments can be configured to hold a lap-top
If Equipped
computer, a cellular telephone, CD’s and miscellaneous
items. The top of the cover provides a generous firm
surface to serve as a desktop for your “mobile office.” 3
WARNING!
• This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the

armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or an accident. Only use the center
seating position when the armrest is fully upright.
• In an accident, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs (4.5
The center portion of the seat folds down to provide an kg). These items could be thrown about endanger-
armrest with unique storage compartments under the lid. ing occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should
Push the button on the front of the armrest to raise the not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
cover. Inside there is a power outlet (if equipped),
Center Storage Compartment (Bucket Seats) — If

CAUTION!
Equipped
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with Center Storage Compartment
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be Push the upper button on the front of the armrest to raise
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the the upper cover. Inside is a power outlet (if equipped), a
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. cut out for a cell phone charger cord, removable coin
holder (if equipped), and a divider to configure the
storage area into separate compartments. Lift the lower

CAUTION!
handle on the front of the armrest, and raise the armrest
for access to the lower storage bin. On Quad Cab models • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
the rear of the floor console offers a power outlet, and a power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
tip out bin. use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will 3
WARNING! discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
• This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
operation, or an accident. Only use the center vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
seating position when the armrest is fully upright. battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
• In an accident, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs (4.5 • After the use of high power draw accessories, or
kg). These items could be thrown about endanger- long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
ing occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg). driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Storage and Seats (Quad Cab Models)

Located in the center of the front 40/20/40 seat cushion
there is a storage compartment.
Standard cab models also have storage behind the seat.
The Quad Cab models provide additional storage under
the rear seat. Lift the seat to access the storage compart-
ment.
Quad Cab Storage

Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated Side
handles are built into the back panel of the cab, behind
view Mirrors — If Equipped
the rear seat.
The Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated
side view mirrors are activated by pressing the
heated grid button, located on the Climate Control panel,
3
with the ignition On. Turning Off the ignition will
deactivate the Electric Rear Window Defroster and
Heated side view mirrors feature. These features also
turn off after activation, when 15 minutes have elapsed.
To reactivate, simply press the button again.
Grocery Bag Hooks

Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped

A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch

The power sliding rear window switch is located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls. Press the
right side of the switch to open the glass and the left side
of the switch to close the glass.
FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!
Quad Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat, may be
equipped with a folding load floor. Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you
may experience, abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration,
or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor 3
may move around with force and strike occupants,
resulting in serious or fatal injury.
Quad Cab Rear 60/40 Seat

Unfolding the Load Floor 2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until
the load floor unfolds into position.
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
Load Floor In Open Position

Unfolding The Load Floor
3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under

the Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the
load floor. 3
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load
floor.
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.

Load Floor Securing Straps
When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor
could move to the down position causing serious 4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the
injury. secured down position before you operate the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
m Instruments And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 ▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
4
m Instrument Clusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 ▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ 5.7L Gas Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 ▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ 6.7L Cummins Diesel Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 ▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
m Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 m Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD (Single Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands
m Electronic Digital Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Free Phone Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 186
m Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . . 192
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — ▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . 205
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
m Sales Code RAK – AM/FM/Cassette/CD (6-Disc)
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — Radio With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Phone, Video, MP3, And WMA Capabilities . . . . 208
m Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc) Radio ▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 208
With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands Free Phone,
▫ Operating Instructions — Tape Player . . . . . . . 212
And Vehicle Entertainment Systems (VES)
Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 ▫ Seek Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 194 ▫ Fast Forward (FF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For CD ▫ Rewind (RW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Tape Eject . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Load/Eject Button
▫ Scan Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . 201
▫ Changing Tape Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Metal Tape Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3
Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 ▫ Pinch Roller Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
▫ Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 ▫ Audio Clock Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For CD m Video Entertainment System (Sales Code XRV) —
Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For CD Audio m Satellite Radio — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 4
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3 Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
And WMA Audio Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF, RAQ, And
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3 And RAK Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
▫ Selecting a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
m Sales Code REC — AM/FM/CD (6–Disc) Radio
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels . . . . . . 229
With Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button — If
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ PTY Button 9Scan9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ REC Setting The Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ PTY Button 9Seek9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 m Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 233
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 m Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 ▫ Heater Only — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
m Remote Sound System Controls — ▫ Air Conditioning And Heating —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 ▫ Air Conditioning With Dual Zone Temperature
Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
m Cassette Tape And Player Maintenance . . . . . . . 232
m Compact Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS
5.7L Gas Engines
6.7L Cummins Diesel Engines
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and
remains there during normal driving, the electrical sys-
1. Check Gages
tem should be serviced.
This light illuminates when the Voltmeter, Engine
Oil Pressure or Engine Coolant Temperature NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of
gages indicate a reading either too high or too low. the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate
Examine the gages carefully, and follow the instructions and a single chime will sound.
contained below for each indicated problem.
NOTE:
NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, the • The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at vari-
Fuel Gage, Voltmeter, Oil Pressure and Engine Coolant ous engine temperatures. This cycling operation is
Temperature gages may not show accurate readings. caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold
When the engine is not running, turn the ignition switch heater system. The number of cycles and the length of
to ON to obtain accurate readings. the cycling operation is controlled by the engine
control module. Post-heat operation can run for sev-
2. Voltmeter
eral minutes, and then the electrical system and volt-
When the engine is running, the gauge indicates
meter needle will stabilize.
the electrical system voltage. The pointer should
stay within the normal range if the battery is charged. If • The cycling action will cause temporary dimming of
the headlamps, interior lamps, and also a noticeable
reduction in blower motor speed.
3. Turn Signal Indicators 6. High Beam Indicator

Lights in instrument cluster flash when outside turn This indicator shows that headlights are on high
signals are operating. beam.
4. Tachometer 7. Seat Belt Reminder Light
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
minute. light will turn on for 5 to 8 seconds as a bulb check.
During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is 4
CAUTION! unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or
when driving, if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled,
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer the Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on
pointer at high rpm for extended periods. Engine continuously. Refer to 9Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Re-
damage may occur. minder System (BeltAlert™)9 in the Occupant Restraints
section for more information.(See page 35 for more
information.)
5. Airbag Indicator Light
The indicator lights and remains lit for 6 to 8 seconds 8. Speedometer
when the ignition is first turned on. If the light stays on, The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
flickers or comes on while driving, have the airbag hour and/or kilometers per hour.
system checked by an authorized dealer.
9. Oil Pressure Gauge 12. OD/OFF

The pointer should always indicate some oil pres- the OD/OFF button is located at the end of the gear shift
sure when the engine is running. A continuous lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW HAUL
high or low reading, under normal driving conditions, OD/OFF button is pushed twice.(See page 277 for more
may indicate a lubrication system malfunction. Immedi- information.)
ate service should be obtained.(See page 406 for more
13. Temperature Gauge
information.)
The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of temperature. Any reading within the normal
the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate range indicates that the cooling system is operat-
and a single chime will sound. ing satisfactorily. The gauge needle will likely indicate a
higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up
10. Transfer Case Position
mountain grades, in heavy traffic, or when towing a
(See page 289 for more information.)
trailer. If the needle rises to the “245°F” mark, stop the
11. TOW HAUL vehicle, shift into N (Neutral), and increase the engine
The TOW HAUL button is located at the end of the gear idle speed for 2 to 3 minutes. If the temperature reading
shift lever. This light will illuminate when the TOW does not return to normal, shut your engine OFF and
HAUL OD/OFF button is pushed once.(See page 277 for allow it to cool. Seek authorized service immediately. See
more information.) Cooling System information in the section on “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle.”
flash at a slower rate after the alarm is set. The security

CAUTION!
light will also come on for about two seconds when the
Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en- ignition is first turned ON.
gine running as you would not be able to react to the 15. Transmission Range Indicator (Automatic
temperature indicator if the engine overheats. Transmissions Only)
When the gear selector lever is moved, this indicator
shows the automatic transmission gear range selected. 4
NOTE: Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1000 rpm at elevated coolant temperatures to improve 16. Odometer/Trip Odometer
engine cooling. The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. U.S. federal regulations require that upon
NOTE: If the gauge pointer moves to either extreme of transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the
the gauge, the “Check Gages” indicator will illuminate purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
and a single chime will sound. driven. Therefore, if the odometer reading is changed
14. Security Light during repair or replacement, be sure to keep a record of
The light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds the reading before and after the service so that the correct
when the vehicle theft alarm is arming. The light will mileage can be determined.
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with an EVIC, most
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and warnings will display in the EVIC. For additional infor-
release the Trip Odometer button. mation, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped” in Section 3.
To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odom-
eter to be reset then push and hold the button until the NOTE: There is also an engine hour function. This
display resets (approximately 2 seconds). indicates the total number of hours the engine has been
running. To display the engine hours perform the follow-
Vehicle Warning Messages
ing: Place the ignition in RUN, but do not start the
For non–Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) engine. With the odometer value displayed, hold the trip
equipped vehicles, and the appropriate conditions exist, button down for a period of 6 seconds. The odometer will
messages such as “door” (indicates that a door(s) may be change to trip value first, then it will display the engine
ajar), “hood” (if the hood is open or ajar, on vehicles with hour value. The engine hours will be displayed for a
remote start), “gASCAP” (which indicates that your gas period of 30 seconds until the ignition is turned off or the
cap is possibly loose or damaged), 9CHANgE OIL” engine is started.
(indicates that the engine oil should be change), “Lo-
Change Oil Message
WASH” (low washer fluid),” LoCOOL” (low engine
coolant level) and “noFUSE” (indicates that the IOD fuse Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
is removed from the Integrated Power Module), will indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
display in the odometer. the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
17. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
your personal driving style.
This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN 4
18. Malfunction Indicator Light
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
which monitors the emissions and engine control
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol-
testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
lowing procedure.
turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions
start the engine). testing the light will come on when the ignition is first
turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the
times within 10 seconds.
bulb does not come on during starting, have the condi-
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. tion investigated promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it 19. Brake System Warning Light
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need This light illuminates when the ignition key is turned to
for system service. the ON position and remains on for a few seconds. If the
light stays on longer, it may be an indication that the
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
parking brake has not been released. This light will
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
illuminate if the brake fluid is low, especially when
possible.
braking or accelerating hard. This light will illuminate if
the ABS indicator light has a malfunction. This light will
CAUTION!
flash if the engine is running and the parking brake is on.
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause If the light remains on when the parking brake is
damage to the engine control system. It also could released, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
affect fuel economy and driveability. malfunction. In this case, the light will remain on until
the cause is corrected.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary
service is required. and continued operation of the vehicle in this condition is
dangerous.
Acceleration which causes the rear wheels to slip for a 21. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
period of time may result in the red brake light illumi- This light informs you of a problem with the
nating and a brake switch code being set on ABS Electronic Throttle Control system. If a prob-
equipped vehicles. Depressing the brake pedal should lem is detected the light will come on while the
extinguish the red brake light. engine is running. If the light remains lit with
the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable,
20. ABS Warning Light
however, see your dealer for service as soon as possible.
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System 4
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
which is described elsewhere in this manual. This
immediate service is required and you may experience
light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine
ON position and may stay on for five seconds. If the ABS
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
light remains on or comes on during driving, it indicates
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
on for 15 seconds as a bulb check. If the light does not
functioning and that service is required. See your autho-
come on during starting, have the system checked by an
rized dealer immediately. The ABS light could also
authorized dealer.
illuminate during loss of traction and remain illuminated
until the brake pedal is pressed. 22. SERV 4WD Indicator
The 4WD indicator will be illuminated whenever the
4WD mode is engaged for either the manual or electric
shift 4WD systems. The SERV 4WD indicator monitors
the electric shift 4WD system. If the SERV 4WD light light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
4WD system is not functioning properly and that service light goes off.
is required.
25. Wait To Start Indicator — Diesel Only
23. Water In Fuel Indicator — Diesel Only The Wait To Start Indicator will illuminate when
Indicates there is water detected in the fuel the ignition is turned to the run position and the
filter. Refer to the Maintenance section, Drain- intake manifold temperature is below 66 degrees F.
ing Fuel/Water Separator Filter, for water Follow engine starting procedure for proper engine start-
drain procedure.(See page 417 for more infor- ing and operating. Wait until the Wait To Start Indicator
mation.) turns OFF then start the vehicle.
24. Transmission Oil Temperature Warning Light NOTE: The Wait To Start Indicator may not illuminate if
(Automatic Transmissions Only) the engine coolant temperature is warm enough.
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
26. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button
mission fluid temperature that might occur
Press this button to toggle between the odometer and the
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
trip odometer display. Holding the button in resets the
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
trip odometer reading when in trip mode.
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
operation (e.g. snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
27. Fuel Gauge Ram fuel tank volumes are as follows:

Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the
• 52 gallons - Standard Rear Tank
ON position.
• 22 gallons - Optional Mid Ship Tank
28. Low Fuel Warning Light
Glows when the pointer is between “E” and 1/8 29. CRUISE Light
indication mark (approximately 15% of tank vol- This indicator lights when the electronic speed control
ume) on the fuel gauge. When the fuel gauge system is turned on. 4
pointer is on “E” (equivalent to Distance To Empty [DTE]
= 0 on the overhead console if so equipped) there is ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
reserve fuel capacity, which corresponds to approxi- The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
mately 8% of tank volume. This reserve capacity was put the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
in place to prevent the likelihood of customers running time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
out of fuel when operating at maximum load conditions model) whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
in areas where there aren’t many gas stations.(See page “ACC” position.
137 for more information.) When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or
when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keep-
ing is accurately maintained.
On the RAQ radio the time button alternates the location RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
of the time and frequency on the display. On the REF only
Radio Broadcast Signals
one of the two, time or frequency is displayed at a time.
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
Clock Setting Procedure most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune / believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
Audio control. you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
/ Audio control to set the minutes.
nals.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
Two Types of Signals
control.
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait approximately Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
5 seconds. causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances FM Reception

Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude, tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
interfere very little with the frequency variations that which is the major feature of FM radio.
carry the FM signal.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
AM Reception equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped) 4
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
and neon signs. will cancel this feature.
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC) Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
position to operate the radio.
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
side of your radio faceplate.
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
REF Radio is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode) NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the MUTE button mutes the microphone.
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
SEEK Button (Radio Mode) Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop 4
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain the search, press SCAN a second time.
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan
stopping until you release it.
through preset stations in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if
MUTE Button (Radio Mode) equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
speakers. 9MUTE9 will display. Press the MUTE button a search, press PSCAN a second time.
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Time Button
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will cancel the MUTE
5 seconds.
feature.
Clock Setting Procedure TUNE Control (Radio Mode)

Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Audio control.
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
begin to blink.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio decrease the Bass tones.
control.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds. will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel- increase or decrease the Treble tones.
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will You may add a second station to each push-button by
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers. the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit memory can be selected by pressing the push-button 4
setting tone, balance, and fade. twice.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
Push-Button Memory button number will display.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
Preset Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
Operation Instructions - CD Mode • If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
• This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD SEEK Button (CD Mode)
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
radio display. beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
seconds of the current selection.
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will MUTE Button (CD Mode)
begin at the start of track one. Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. 9MUTE9 will display. Press the MUTE button a
NOTE:
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
• On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD Mode) RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track. Mode)
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time. Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
Press this button and the disc will unload and
change of pace.
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode. Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly 4
selected track.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
TIME Button (CD Mode) feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
for 5 seconds.
Play.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an speakers. 9MUTE9 will display. Press the MUTE button a
MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
through the vehicle speakers. will also return the sound from the speakers.
The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5 No function.
mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.
No function.
NOTE: The radio will return to the last stored mode if
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK posi-
tion to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode. PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If

Press this button to change the display from elapsed Equipped
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display Refer to the “HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™)”
for 5 seconds. section of the Owner’s Manual.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode) Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
No function. Equipped
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s 4
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Manual.
No function.
Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS
FREE PHONE, AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS (VES) CAPABILITIES
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
RAQ Radio
Mode Button (Radio Mode) will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
CD player, Satellite Radio, or Vehicle Entertainment return the sound from the speakers
System (VES) (if equipped).
NOTE: In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
SEEK Button (Radio Mode) MUTE button mutes the microphone.
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if 4
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
the search, press SCAN a second time.
stopping until you release it.
MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode)
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio
speakers. 9MUTE9 will be displayed. Press the MUTE
Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
only).
Time Button RW/FF (Radio Mode)

Press the time button and the time of day will be Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
displayed for 5 seconds. to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
Clock Setting Procedure
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune / Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
Audio control. counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
begin to blink.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
control. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL- types:
ANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
16 Digit-Character
left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side Program Type
Display
speakers.
No program type or un-
None 4
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will defined
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to Adult Hits Adult_Hits
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak- Alert Alert Alert Alert
ers. Classical Classical
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone, Classic Rock Classic_Rock
balance and fade. College College
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode) Country Country
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for Emergency Test Emergency Test
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time Foreign Language Foreign_Language
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button or Information Information
turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will
Jazz Jazz By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
News News displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
Nostalgia Nostalgia
function only operates when in the FM mode.
Oldies Oldies
Personality Personality If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Public Public Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues
Religious Music Religious_Music SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the
Religious Talk Religious_Talk Push-Button Memory
Rock Rock When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET/DIR
Soft Soft
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
Soft Rock Soft_Rock window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_&_B station and press and release that button. If a button is
Sports Sports not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET/DIR
Talk Talk button, the station will continue to play but will not be
Top 40 Top_40 stored into push-button memory.
Weather Weather
You may add a second station to each push-button by Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press Play)
the SET/DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12
FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2 discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks 4
twice. and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding Inserting Compact Disc(s)
button number will be displayed. Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)

CAUTION!
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
CD player mechanism. to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF. Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio speakers. 9MUTE9 will be displayed. Press the MUTE
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and button a second time and the sound from the speakers
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
show the disc number, the track number, and index time radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of return the sound from the speakers.
track 1. SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Radio display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc
Play) is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
LOAD/ EJECT - Load Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push- all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
button with the corresponding number where
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT 4
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
DISC. After the radio displays 9LOAD DISC9 insert the
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
CD into the player.
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout.
Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
reading the disc. 9INSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are inserted
within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will be dis-
LOAD / EJT - Eject
played.
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload ignition OFF.
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Press this button to change the display from a large CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
change of pace.
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
works in a similar manner. selected track.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone, tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode. feature.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode. Play.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions 1 - 6 for Play/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric- • Maximum number of files: 255
tions.
• Maximum number of folders: 100
Supported Media (Disc Types)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are 4
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW. • Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a
3-character extension)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. 3-character extension)
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after
writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre-

The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten- Bit rate (kbps)
cation quency (kHz)
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3 320, 256, 224,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will 48, 44.1, 32
Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
not play the file. 56, 48, 40, 32
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to 160, 128, 144,
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
16, 8
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
VBR bit rates. are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the Play)
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
time to start playing the MP3 files.
MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
by the following: the first ten seconds plays the previous file. 4
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
CD-R media
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
to load than non-multisession discs button with the corresponding number where
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
increase with more files and folders
DISC. After the radio displays 9LOAD DISC9 insert the
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended CD into the player.
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
is loading.
writing to the disc.
LOAD / EJECT - Eject MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push- Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc.
button with the corresponding number where The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
and move to the entrance for easy removal. able).
Radio display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc
Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
9elapsed time9 priority mode.
Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the
message display priority mode or elapsed time display
priority mode will display the song title for each file.
the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout. RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display the MP3 selection.
9INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
will go to the previous tuner mode.
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Switches back to Radio mode. Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Manual.
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Equipped)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s 4
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Manual.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
to select a folder. System (VESt) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VESt)
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Guide.
SALES CODE RAK – AM/FM/CASSETTE/CD Operating Instructions - Radio Mode

(6-DISC) RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE
RADIO, HANDS FREE PHONE, VIDEO, MP3, and
WMA CAPABILITIES
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Cassette, Satellite, or Vehicle Entertainment
RAK Radio System (VES) (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode) Clock Setting Procedure

Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode.
Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left 2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
side to seek down. The radio will remained tuned to the Audio control.
new station until you make another selection. Holding
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
the button and will bypass stations without stopping
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will 4
until you release it.
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
control.
the next station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds (satellite 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
scan 8 seconds) at each listenable station before continu-
INFO Button (Radio Mode)
ing to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second
Press the INFO button for an RBDS station (one with call
time.
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
Time Button message broadcast (if available) from an FM station (FM
Press the time button and the time of day will display for mode only).
5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode) Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the increase or decrease the Treble tones.
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel- Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
lite (if equipped) frequencies. display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
TUNE Control (Radio Mode) adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
the frequency. display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode) the sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes. Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade balance, and fade.
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display. RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
decrease the Bass tones. 5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5-second time
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID out, the PTY icon will turn off. Turning the tune knob
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones. be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad-
cast PTY information.
Turn the tune knob to select the following format types: Nostalgia Nostalgia
16 Digit-Character Dis- Jazz Jazz
Program Type
play Classical Classical
No program type or un- Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues
None
defined
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_&_B
News News
Foreign Language Foreign_Language
Information Information 4
Religious Music Religious_Music
Sports Sports
Religious Talk Religious_Talk
Talk Talk
Personality Personality
Rock Rock
Public Public
Classic Rock Classic_Rock
College College
Adult Hits Adult_Hits
Unassigned
Soft Rock Soft_Rock
Weather Weather
Top 40 Top_40
Country Country By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
Oldies Oldies
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
Soft Soft
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
will tune to the preset station. up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
NOTE: If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob,
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a
“PTY seek”. Seek Button
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
Buttons 1 - 6 (Radio Mode)
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}. Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
move 2 selections, etc.
left and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
Fast Forward (FF) Scan Button

Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
Changing Tape Direction
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
opposite direction.
being played), press Preset 6. The lighted arrow in the
Rewind (RW) display window will show the new direction. 4
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
Metal Tape Selection
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
player will automatically select the correct equalization.
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
Pinch Roller Release
Tape Eject
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch is turned
Press this button and the cassette will disen-
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
gage and eject from the radio.
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
Noise Reduction compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks
tape player is on, but may be switched off. and WMA.
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Preset 1 after you insert the tape. The NR light in the
display will go off when the Dolby System is off. CAUTION!
* ”Dolby” noise reduction is manufactured under license This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo- CD player mechanism.
ratories Licensing Corporation.
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play) You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
position to operate the radio. ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE: Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact show the disc number, the track number, and index time
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) Radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the disc
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to reading the disc.
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
LOAD/EJT - Eject
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) the CD was loaded and the disc will unload 4
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the and move to the entrance for easy removal.
CD currently playing. Radio display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play) Press and hold the LOAD/EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
LOAD/EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push- If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
button with the corresponding number where 15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
DISC. After the radio displays 9INSERT DISC,9 insert the the radio will play the next CD after a 2-minute timeout.
CD into the player. If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
9INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio MODE for CD Audio Play)
will go to the previous tuner mode. Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) change of pace.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
NOTE: MP3 and WMA Random Play are for file folders
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
only.
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
selected track.
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
works in a similar manner. tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode. Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD MODE for CD Audio Play) The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 15
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When • Maximum number of folders: 100
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
tions. 4
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator 9.9 and a
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R, and CD-RW. • Level 2: 31 (including a separator 9.9 and a
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
When reading discs recorded using formats other than CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read Discs created with an option such as 9keep disc open after
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor- writing9 are most likely multisession discs. The use of
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported. multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre-

The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten- Bit rate (kbps)
cation quency (kHz)
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3 320, 256, 224,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will 48, 44.1, 32
Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
not play the file. 56, 48, 40, 32
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to 160, 128, 144,
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
16, 8
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rates. are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 and WMA Files Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 and
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the WMA Audio Play)
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
time to start playing the MP3 files.
file. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the
Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may beginning of the file. Pressing the button within the first
be affected by the following: ten seconds plays the previous file. 4
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA
CD-R media Play)
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer LOAD/EJT - Load
to load than non-multisession discs Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended DISC. After the radio displays 9INSERT DISC,9 insert the
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a CD into the player.
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before The radio display will show 9LOADING DISC9 when the
writing to the disc. disc is loading.
LOAD/EJT - Eject INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)

Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push- Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc.
button with the corresponding number where The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
and move to the entrance for easy removal. able).
Radio display will show 9EJECTING DISC9 when the disc
Press the INFO button once more to return to 9elapsed
time9 priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button while in the message
display priority mode or elapsed time display priority
mode will display the song title for each file.
the radio will play the next CD after a 2-minute timeout. RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display the file or MP3 and WMA selection.
9INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
will go to the previous tuner mode.
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Switches back to Radio mode. Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Phone” in Section 3 of the Owner’s
RND/PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Manual.
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Equipped)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s 4
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Manual.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
to select a folder. System (VES) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)
Buttons 1 - 6 (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Guide.”
SALES CODE REC — AM/FM/CD (6–DISC) RADIO menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destina-
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM tions and routes, AM/FM stereo radio and six-disc CD
changer with MP3 capability.
Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a
DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers
all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
REC Setting the Clock
REC Radio GPS Clock
Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3 The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
Capability (REC) - combines a Global-Positioning the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
System-based navigation system with an integrated color satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the sys- 2. To show the GPS clock, select “Displayed Clock: GPS
tem’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone Clock” and press ENTER.
and daylight savings information is set.
3. To adjust the time zone, Select “Time Zone” and press
1. At the Main Menu screen, highlight “Clock Setup” ENTER. Select the appropriate time zone and press
and press ENTER OR press and hold for 3 seconds the ENTER.
TIME button on the unit’s faceplate. The Clock Setup
4. To turn daylight savings on or off, select “Daylight
screen appears. 4
Savings” and press ENTER. Select “On” or “Off” and
press ENTER.
5. Select DONE to exit from the clock setting mode. Press
ENTER to save your changes. If you press CANCEL or
NAV then your changes will not be saved.
User Defined Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different than the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
choosing the “User Defined Clock” option.
1. At the Clock Setup screen highlight “Displayed 3. To decrease the clock by one hour, use the Select
Clock: User Defined Clock”. Encoder to highlight the “-” sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another hour.
4. To increase the clock by minutes, make sure “MIN +”
is highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another minute.
5. To decrease the clock by minutes, use the Select
Encoder to highlight the “-“ sign. Press ENTER. Press
ENTER again to decrease the clock by another minute.
6. Select “DONE” to exit from the clock setting mode.
Press ENTER to save your changes. If you press CAN-
CEL or NAV then your changes will not be saved.
2. To increase the clock by hours, make sure “HR +” is
highlighted and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to
increase the clock by another hour. You will see on the
“User Defined Time” display the number of hours you
have increased the clock by.
Audio Clock Display 3. To switch the clock to the small clock, quickly press
TIME again.
Select this option to change the size of the clock on the
audio screens.
1. When you are at an audio screen, quickly press the
TIME button on the navigation faceplate.
2. In this example the large clock appears on the screen. 4
4. To toggle back to the large clock, simply press TIME.

VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES CODE System Activation

XRV) — IF EQUIPPED Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
The optional VES™ (Video Entertainment System) con- may begin listening immediately to the one year of
sists of a DVD player and LCD (liquid crystal display) SIRIUS audio service that is included with the factory-
screen, a battery-powered remote control, and two head- installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will
sets. The system is located in the headliner behind the contact you to supply a welcome kit and to confirm
front row seat. Refer to your VES™ User’s Manual for subscription information, including the set up of your
detailed operating instructions. on-line listening account at no additional charge. For
further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED 7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com.
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast- Please have the following information available when
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to calling:
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
lite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music, 1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil- Number (ESN/SID).
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. 2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification ESN/SID Access with RAQ and RAK Radios
Number (ESN/SID) With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num- the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following bers will display. The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode
steps: when any other button is pushed, the ignition is turned
OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button was
ESN/SID Access with REF Radios 4
pushed.
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons ESN/SID Access with REC Navigation Radios
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will display. Press the
With the ignition in the ACCESSORY position and the
SEEK UP button to display the next four digits. Continue
radio off, press the CD Eject and Set buttons simulta-
to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/SID
neously until the 12 digits of the ESN/SID appear on the
digits display. The SEEK DOWN will page down until
screen.
the first four digits display. The radio will exit the
ESN/SID mode when any other button is pushed, the
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any
button was pushed.
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, RAQ, and RAK Selecting a Channel

Radios Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word 9SAT9
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
appears in the display.
the button is released.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
mode.
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ and RAK Radio radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word 9SAT9 moving on to the next channel. The word 9SCAN9 will
appears in the display. appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information, such as song NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
title and artist, press the MSG or INFO button. can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-
7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock-
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
ing. Please have your ESN/SID information available.
Satellite radio mode.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels NOTE: Pressing the 9SEEK9 or 9SCAN9 button, while
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you performing a music type scan, will change the channel by
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the channel and stop the search.
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
PTY Button (SEEK(
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button — If When the desired program is obtained, press the 9SEEK9 4
Equipped button within five seconds. The channel will change to
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your the next channel that matches the program type selected.
radio.
Satellite Antenna
PTY Button (SCAN( To ensure optimum reception on vehicles available with
When the desired program type is obtained, press the a luggage rack, do not place items on the roof around the
9SCAN9 button within five seconds. The radio will play 7 rooftop antenna location. Metal objects placed within the
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased perfor-
channel of the selected program type. Press the 9SCAN9 mance. Larger luggage items should be placed as far
button a second time to stop the search. forward as possible. Do not place items directly on or
above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Remote Sound System Controls
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
EQUIPPED button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to switch will decrease the volume. The center button of the
access the switches. right hand control will allow you to change the mode.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push selection or to the beginning of the previous selection if it
button in the center. The function of the left hand control is within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
is different depending on which mode you are in.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
The following describes the left hand control operation in second selection, three times, it will play the third, etc.
each mode.
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
Radio Operation function in this mode.
Pressing the top of the left side switch will SEEK up for 4
CD Player
the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
The button located in the center of the left hand control will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons. after the current track begins to play.
Tape Player If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
selection on the cassette. Pressing the bottom of the
The button in the center of the left hand switch has no
switch once will go to the beginning of the current
function in this mode.
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition, shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
take the following precautions: deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin-
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
ished.
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
slackness and dust when it is not in use. periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers. As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
adhering flatly to the cassette.
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
COMPACT DISC MAINTENANCE NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-

To keep the compact discs in good condition, take the lar disc, it may be damaged, oversized, or have theft
following precautions: protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface. RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, Under certain conditions, the operation of a cellular
wiping from center to edge. phone in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy perfor- 4
mance from your radio. This condition may be lessened
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna.
ing the disc. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repo-
or antistatic sprays. sitioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio
volume be turned down or off during cellular phone
5. Store the disc in its case after playing. operation.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
CLIMATE CONTROLS Heater Only — If Equipped

The controls for the heating and ventilation system in this
vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs. These comfort
controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
Manual Heating Controls
Climate Control Location

The mode control (at the right of the Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level)
control panel) can be set in any of the Select the recirculation modes when
following positions: the outside air contains smoke or
odors. This feature allows for recircu-
lation of interior air only. Air flows
through the panel outlets in this mode.
Air flows through the panel only or
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system through both the panel and floor vents 4
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between depending on the selected mode
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden- (panel vs bi-level).
tified by the small dots.
Bi-Level
Panel Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel and at the floor.
instrument panel.
Mix
Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
floor and defroster outlets.
Defrost Temperature Control

Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield The rotary knob at the center of the
through the defroster outlets located at the base of control panel controls the temperature
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the of the interior air. You can choose your
edge of each side of the instrument panel. degree of comfort by rotating the
knob. The coldest temperature setting
Blower Control
is to the extreme left (blue region) and
The rotary knob on the left of the
the warmest setting is to the extreme
control panel is the blower control.
right (red region) of the rotation.
Turn the knob clockwise to one of the
four positions to obtain the blower
speed you desire. To turn the blower
off, turn the knob to the far left posi-
tion.
Air Conditioning and Heating — If Equipped Air Conditioning Operation

To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan
control at any speed and press the snowflake
button located at the right of the control panel.
Conditioned air will be directed through the
outlets selected by the mode control. A light in the
snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on.
Press the button a second time to turn the air condition- 4
ing off.
Slight changes in engine speed or power may be noticed
when the air conditioning compressor is on. This is a
normal occurrence as the compressor will cycle on and
off to maintain comfort and increase fuel economy.
Air Conditioning And Heating
The mode control (at the right of the both the panel and floor vents depending on the selected
control panel) can be set in any of the mode (panel vs bi-level).
following positions:
NOTE: Selecting a “Recirculation Mode” mode does not
necessarily consume more fuel than normal A/C mode.
Panel
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system instrument panel.
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
Bi-Level
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden-
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the
tified by the small dots.
instrument panel and at the floor.
Recirculation Modes (Panel or Bi-Level)
Floor
Select the recirculation modes when
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
the outside air contains smoke, odors,
lets located under the instrument panel.
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is
desired. This feature allows for recir- Mix
culation of interior air only. Air flows Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
through the panel only or through floor and defroster outlets, and the air conditioning
may be on.
Defrost Temperature Control

Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield The rotary knob at the center of the
through the defroster outlets located at the base of control panel controls the temperature
the windshield, and the demister outlets located at the of the interior air. You can choose your
edge of each side of the instrument panel, and the air degree of comfort by rotating the
conditioning may be on. knob. The coldest temperature setting
is to the extreme left (blue region) and
Blower Control 4
the warmest setting is to the extreme
The rotary knob on the left of the
right (red region) of the rotation.
control panel is the blower control.
Turn the knob clockwise to one of the
Circulation
four positions to obtain the blower
The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
speed you desire. To turn the blower
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
off, turn the knob to the far left posi-
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
tion.
exchange of cab air.
Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also pro- Air Conditioning with Dual Zone Temperature
vide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation Control — If Equipped
whenever the Floor, Mix or Defrost modes are in use. To With the Dual Zone Temperature Control System, each
remove frost from the side windows, it is best to use the front seat occupant can independently control the tem-
full defrost mode. perature of air coming from the outlets on their side of
the vehicle.
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
a problem with the air conditioning system.
Dual Zone Control Head

Air Conditioning and Heating Operation Recirculation Pushbutton

To turn on the Air Conditioning, set the fan control at any Pushing the Recirculation button al-
speed and press the snowflake button located on the lows interior air to recirculate continu-
control panel. Conditioned air will be directed through ously in any position except defrost
the outlets selected by the mode control. A light in the and defrost/floor mode for rapid cool
snowflake button shows that the air conditioning is on. down of the interior. See “Fast
Press the button a second time to turn the air condition- Cooldown” later in this section.
ing off. 4
Mode Control
A/C Pushbutton
The mode control allows you to
With the fan control in the ON posi-
choose from several patterns of air
tion, pushing the A/C button turns on
distribution.
the air conditioning compressor. An
indicator light on the button shows
that the Air Conditioning compressor
is on. Conditioned air is now directed
through the mode outlets selected.
NOTE: To improve your selection choices, the system
Pushing the button a second time turns the compressor
allows you to operate at intermediate positions between
OFF.
the major modes. These intermediate positions are iden- Mix

tified by the small dots and give an even blend of both Outside air flows in equal proportions through the
modes. floor and defroster outlets.
Panel Defrost
Outside air flows through the outlets located in the Outside air is primarily directed to the windshield
instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to through the defroster outlets located at the base of
direct the airflow. the windshield and side window demist outlets.
Bi-Level NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru- both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes, even if
ment panel and those located on the floor. the A/C button has not been pressed. This dehumidifies
the air to help dry the windshield.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer Blower Control
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved The rotary knob on the left of the con-
comfort during sunny but cool conditions. trol panel is the blower control. Turn the
knob clockwise to one of the four posi-
Heat
tions to obtain the blower speed you
Outside air flows primarily through the floor out-
desire. To turn the blower off, turn the
lets located under the instrument panel.
knob to the far left position.
Dual Zone Temperature Control Circulation

The cab is designed with features to promote outside air
circulation. There are grilles in the cab back panel. These
are air exhausters that provide the means for regular
exchange of cab air.
Side window demisters direct air flow specifically to the
window glass to help prevent interior fogging of the 4
glass. They are located in the extreme outside upper
edges of the instrument panel. The demisters also pro-
vide extra air ducts for circulation. They are in operation
whenever the Floor, Mix or Defrost modes are in use.
NOTE: When you turn off the engine you may hear a
Dual Zone Temperature Control
hissing sound from under the hood for a short period of
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air time. This is a normal condition that occurs if the air
inside the passenger compartment. This is accomplished conditioning system has been on. It is not an indication of
by having separate temperature control slides for both a problem with the air conditioning system.
the driver and front passenger. The blue area of the scale
indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
Operating Tips Window Fogging

Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
Fast Cooldown
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
For a fast cooldown, turn the blower fan rotary knob to
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases
the extreme right position, turn the mode control to the
turning on the Air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake
panel fresh position, press the snowflake button to turn
button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control,
on the air conditioning, and drive with the windows
air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.
open for the first few minutes. Once the hot air has been
expelled, close the windows and press the recirculation As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to
push-button, on dual zone control or switch the mode direct air onto the windshield by using MIX Mode
from panel/fresh to panel/recirculate on single zone position on the control. Adjust the temperature control
control. When a comfortable condition has been reached, and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher blower
choose a mode position and adjust the temperature speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the
control slide and blower speed as necessary to maintain windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
comfort. For high humidity conditions it may be neces- defrost mode.
sary to remain in the Recirculation mode to maintain Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
comfort. non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Summer Operation NOTE: On models equipped with Diesel engines, the

Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high idle speed will automatically increase to 1000 rpm at
quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide elevated coolant temperatures to improve engine cooling.
proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50 %
automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
concentration is recommended. Refer to Recommended
a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
Fluids and Genuine Parts for the proper coolant type.
Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort. 4
When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic
Winter Operation
in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, addi-
When operating the system during the winter months,
tional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear to
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstruc-
increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed. When
tions.
stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to shift into
NEUTRAL and depress the accelerator slightly for fast
idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed.
Operating Tips Chart

STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
m Starting Procedures – Gas Engines . . . . . . . . . . . 252 ▫ Normal Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold
Air Temperature Above 66°F (19°C) . . . . . . . . 257
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . 252
▫ Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air 5
Temperature Below 66°F (19°C) . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Starting Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
m Normal Operation – Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Cold Weather Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
m Starting Procedures – Diesel Engines . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Engine Idling — In Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 256
▫ Stopping The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . 256
▫ Engine Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 ▫ Downshifting – Gas Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

▫ Cooling System Tips — Automatic ▫ Downshifting – Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
m Four-Wheel-Drive Operation — If Equipped . . . . 289
m Engine Block Heater (Gas Engines)—
▫ Manually Shifted Transfer Case Operating
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Information/Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
m Diesel Exhaust Brake (Engine Braking) –
▫ Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
m Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ Transfer Case Reminder Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Automatic Transmission With Overdrive
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating
(5 Speed 545RFE) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 273
Information/Precautions (4 Position Switch) —
▫ Automatic Transmission (6 Speed AS68RC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Shifting Procedure — Electronically Shifted
m Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
▫ Manual Transmission — 6 Speed (G56) . . . . . . 286 m Limited-Slip Differential — If Equipped . . . . . . . 301
▫ Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . 287 m Power Take Off Operation – If Equipped . . . . . . 302
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
▫ Stationary Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 m Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

▫ Mobile Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Power Take Off – Aftermarket Installation . . . . 304 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 317
m Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 318
m Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 m Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 5
m Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 ▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
m Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 ▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 329
m Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Brake Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . 310 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
m Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 ▫ Adding Fuel (Diesel Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

m Supplemental Tire Pressure Information — If m Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
m Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
m Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
m Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
m Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
▫ Dual Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
m Engine Runaway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
m Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 ▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Fuel Requirements (5.7L Gas Engines) . . . . . . . 337 ▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ Fuel Requirements (6.7L Diesel Engines) . . . . . 341 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
m Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 ▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . 364
▫ Adding Fuel (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 m Snowplow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
▫ Before Plowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 m Recreational Towing

(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability . . 366
▫ Recreational Towing – 2 Wheel Drive
▫ Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
▫ Recreational Towing – 4 Wheel Drive
▫ Methods For Removing Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 5
STARTING PROCEDURES – GAS ENGINES

WARNING!
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. Do not leave children or animals inside parked
The starter should not be operated for more than 15- vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such cause serious injury or death.
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
WARNING! Manual Transmission – If Equipped

Apply the parking brake, place the gearshift control lever
Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key in NEUTRAL and depress the clutch pedal to the floor
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with
in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start
moving the gear selection lever or by pressing the unless the clutch is fully depressed.
accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive heat in Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
the exhaust system, resulting in overheating and Start the engine with the selector lever in NEUTRAL or
vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries. PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is
obtained without pumping or depressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key to the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
10 seconds, turn the key to the OFF position, wait 5
seconds, then repeat the starting procedure.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be 5
depressed to shift out of Park (P).
Tip Start Feature — Automatic Transmission Only
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition key briefly Ignition Key Positions
to START position, and release it. The starter motor will If Engine Fails To Start
continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
when the engine is running. normal starting procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there
while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess
fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION! WARNING!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
15 seconds before trying again. mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
WARNING! and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start type of start can be dangerous if done improperly.
the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing See section 6 of this manual for the proper jump
serious personal injury. starting procedures and follow them carefully.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not STARTING PROCEDURES – DIESEL ENGINES
have enough power to continue running when the key is Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accel- inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the
The starter should not be operated for more than 15-
accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running
second intervals. Waiting a few minutes between such
smoothly.
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal WARNING!
held to the floor, the normal starting procedure should be 5
repeated. Be sure to turn off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep
After Starting in your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de- moving the gear selection lever or by pressing the
crease as the engine warms up. accelerator pedal. This may cause excessive heat in
the exhaust system, resulting in overheating and
vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries.
The Cummins Diesel engine is equipped with several

WARNING!
features designed to assist cold weather starting and
Do not leave children or animals inside parked operation:
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may • The engine block heater is a resistance heater installed
cause serious injury or death. in the water jacket of the engine just above and behind
the oil filter. It requires a 110–115 volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the gearshift control lever NOTE: The engine block heater cord is a factory in-
in NEUTRAL and depress the clutch pedal to the floor stalled option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater
before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with cords are available from your authorized Mopart dealer.
a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start • A 12–volt heater built into the fuel filter housing aids
unless the clutch is fully depressed. in preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by a built-in
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped thermostat.
Start the engine with the selector lever in NEUTRAL or • A heated intake air system both improves engine
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any starting and reduces the amount of white smoke
driving range. generated by a warming engine.
Normal Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air

CAUTION!
Temperature Above 66°F (19°C)
Observe the Instrument Panel Cluster lights when start- If WATER IN FUEL indicator light remains on DO
ing the engine. NOT START engine before you drain water from the
1. Always apply the parking brake. fuel filter to avoid engine damage. See Section 7 —
Maintaining Your Vehicle, for water drain
2. Shift into PARK for an automatic transmission. Fully procedures.
depress and hold the clutch and shift into NEUTRAL for
a manual transmission. Models with manual transmis-
sion are equipped with a clutch interlocking cranking 4. Turn the ignition key to START and crank the engine. 5
system. The clutch must be fully depressed to start the Do not press the accelerator during starting.
vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position and look at CAUTION!
the instrument panel cluster lamps.
Do not crank engine for more than 15 seconds at a
time as starter motor damage may result. Turn key to
OFF and wait at least two minutes before trying
again.
5. When the engine starts, release the key.

CAUTION!
6. Check to see that there is oil pressure.
Do not crank engine for more than 15 seconds at a
7. Release the parking brake. time or starter motor damage may result. Turn key to
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air OFF and wait at least 2 minutes for starter to cool
Temperature Below 66°F (19°C) before repeating start procedure.
NOTE: The temperature displayed on the overhead

console (if equipped) does not necessarily reflect the • The WAIT TO START light will remain on for a period
engine manifold air temperature. When certain engine of time (length of time depends on engine tempera-
temperatures fall below 66°F (19°C) the lamp will remain ture).
on indicating the intake manifold heater system is active.
• After the WAIT TO START light goes off, turn the
Follow the steps in the Normal Starting Procedure ex- ignition key to START. Do not press the accelerator
cept: during starting.
• After engine start-up, check to see that there is oil
pressure.
• Allow the engine to idle about three minutes until For Extremely Cold Weather Starting — Engine
the manifold heaters have completed the post-heat Manifold Air Temperature Below 0°F (- 18°C)
cycle. In extremely cold weather below 0°F (- 18°C) it may be
beneficial to cycle the manifold heaters twice before
• Release the parking brake and drive.
attempting to start the engine. This can be accomplished
NOTE: Engine idle speed will automatically increase to by turning the ignition OFF for at least 5 seconds and
1000 rpm at low coolant temperatures to improve engine then back ON after the WAIT TO START light has gone
warm-up. off, but before the engine is started. However, repeated
cycling of the manifold heaters will result in damage to
NOTE: If the engine stalls or if the ignition switch is left 5
the heater elements or reduced battery voltage.
On for more than 2 minutes after the WAIT TO START
light goes out, reset the grid heaters by turning the NOTE: If multiple pre-heat cycles are used before
ignition switch to Off for at least 5 seconds and then back starting, additional engine run time may be required to
On. Repeat steps 3 through 7 of the normal starting maintain battery state of charge at a satisfactory level.
procedure.
• If the engine stalls after the initial start, the ignition
must be turned to the OFF position for at least 5
seconds and then to the ON position to recycle the
manifold heaters.
NOTE: Excessive white smoke and poor engine perfor- NOTE: Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
mance will result if manifold heaters are not recycled. 1000 rpm at low coolant temperatures to improve engine
warm-up.
• Heat generated by the manifold heaters dissipates
rapidly in a cold engine. If more than two minutes NOTE: When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of
pass between the time the WAIT TO START light goes fuel or the fuel gels at low temperatures, air is pulled into
OFF and the engine is started, recycle the manifold the fuel system.
heaters by turning the ignition OFF for at least 5
You may try priming as described below.
seconds and then back ON.
1. Add a substantial quantity of fuel to the tank (5 to 10
• If the vehicle is driven and vehicle speed exceeds 19
gallons) or eliminate the gelled fuel condition.
mph (31 km) before the manifold heater post-heat
(after start) cycle is complete, the manifold heaters will 2. Crank the engine for 1 to 2 seconds. If the engine does
shut off. not start, then release the key or starter button back to the
RUN position (do not turn the key back to the OFF
• If the engine is started before the WAIT TO START
position). The electric fuel transfer pump will continue to
light turns off, the preheat cycle will turn off.
run and purge air from the system for about 20 seconds.
• If the engine is cranked for more than 10 seconds, the After 20 seconds, attempt to start the engine again.
post-heat cycle will turn off.
3. Start the engine using the Normal Starting Procedure.
4. Repeat the procedure if the engine does not start. Starting Fluids
WARNING! WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system when STARTING FLUIDS or flammable liquids are
cranking the engine or with the engine running. NEVER TO BE USED in the Cummins Diesel (see
Engine operation causes high fuel pressure. High Warning label). Never pour diesel fuel, flammable
pressure fuel spray can cause serious injury or death. liquid, starting fluids (ether) into the air cleaner
canister, air intake piping, or turbocharger inlet in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a 5
NOTE: The engine may run rough until the air is forced flash fire and explosion causing serious personal
from all the fuel lines. injury and engine damage.
The engine is equipped with an automatic electric air

preheating system. If the instructions in this manual are
followed, the engine should start in all conditions.
• Voltmeter Operation:
WARNING!
• The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
Do not leave children or animals inside parked various engine temperatures. This cycling operation
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may is caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake mani-
cause serious injury or death. fold heater system. The number of cycles and the
length of the cycling operation is controlled by the
engine control module. Post-heat operation can run
NORMAL OPERATION – DIESEL ENGINE for several minutes, and then the electrical system
Observe the following when the engine is operating. and voltmeter needle will stabilize.
• All message center lights are off. • The cycling action will cause temporary dimming of
• Check Engine Lamp is off. the headlamps, interior lamps, and also a noticeable
reduction in blower motor speed.
• Engine Oil Pressure is above 10 psi (69 kPa) at idle.
• Low Oil Pressure light is off.
Cold Weather Precautions NOTE:

Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F (0°C) may • Use of Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel or
require special considerations. The following charts sug- Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel results in a
gest these options: noticeable decrease in fuel economy.
Fuel Operating Range • Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel is a blend of
Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur and Number 1 Ultra Low
NOTE: Use “Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels” ONLY.
Sulfur Diesel Fuels which reduces the temperature at
which wax crystals form in fuel.
NOTE: The engine requires the use of “Ultra Low 5
Sulfur Diesel Fuel”. Use of incorrect fuel could result in
engine and exhaust system damage. Refer to Fuel Re-
quirements in this section for further details on fuel
recommendations.
*No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should only be used

where extended arctic conditions (-10°F/-23°C) exist.
Engine Block Heater

WARNING!
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the heater Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
cord to a ground–fault interrupter protected 110–115 volt Damage to the 110–115 volt electrical cord could
AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire exten- cause electrocution.
sion cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood to
the right side and can be located just behind the grille NOTE: The block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
near the headlamp. 6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
NOTE: The engine block heater cord is a factory in- Block Heater Usage
stalled option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater A. Temperatures below 0°F (-18°C)
cords are available from your authorized Mopart dealer.
• Block Heater Required for 15W-40
The block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to
have an adequate warming effect on the coolant. • Block Heater Recommended for 5W-40
B. Temperatures below - 20°F (-29°C)
• Block Heater Required for 5W-40
Winter Front Usage Arctic Operation

If a winter front or cold weather cover is to be used, a Where there are no provisions to keep the engine warm
percentage of the total grille opening area must be left when it is operating in ambient temperatures consistently
uncovered to provide sufficient air flow to the charge air below (-10°F/-23°C), use 5W-40 synthetic engine oil and
cooler and automatic transmission oil cooler. The per- fuel that meets the requirements in Section 7, “Mainte-
centage of opening must be increased with the increasing nance Procedures,” Engine Oil Selection.
ambient air temperature and/or engine load. If the
Engine Warm-Up
cooling fan can be heard cycling frequently, increase the
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold.
size of the opening in the winter front. A suitable cold
When starting a cold engine, bring the engine up to 5
weather cover is available from your Mopart dealer.
operating speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to
Battery Blanket Usage stabilize as the engine warms up.
A battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the battery
NOTE: High-speed, no-load running of a cold engine
temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°). For the same de-
can result in excessive white smoke and poor engine
crease in temperature, the engine requires twice as much
performance. No-load engine speeds should be kept
power to crank at the same RPM. The use of 120 VAC
under 1,200 rpm during the warm-up period, especially
powered battery blankets will greatly increase starting
in cold ambient temperature conditions.
capability at low temperatures. Suitable battery blankets
are available from your authorized Mopart dealer.
If temperatures are below 32°F (0°C), operate the engine with speed control. This feature allows the driver to
at moderate speeds for 5 minutes before full loads are select an elevated idle speed between 1100 and 1500
applied. rpms. Your dealer can enable this feature.
Engine Idling — In Cold Weather NOTE:
Avoid prolonged idling in ambient temperatures below • If ambient temperatures are low and the coolant
0°F. Long periods of idling may be harmful to your temperature is below 200°F (93°C), the engine idle
engine because combustion chamber temperatures can speed will slowly increase to 1000 RPM after 2 minutes
drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely. of idle, if the following conditions are met:
Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to
• foot is off brake pedal and throttle pedal
form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the
unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil • automatic transmission is in Park (P)
and causing rapid wear to the engine. Excessive idle time
• vehicle speed is zero
can also cause damage to the engine exhaust aftertreat-
ment system. • Applying the throttle will cancel fast idle
NOTE: An optional driver-controlled high idle speed is • If the engine is equipped with an exhaust brake,
available on automatic transmission equipped vehicles operating the exhaust brake at idle will greatly im-
prove warm up rate and will help keep the engine
close to operating temperature during extended idle.
Stopping The Engine Idle Time

Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown. Turbo-
Driving (min.) Be-
After full load operation, idle the engine 3 to 5 minutes Load charger
Condition fore Engine
before shutting it down. This idle period will allow the Temperature
Shutdown
lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from Stop and Empty Cool Less than
the combustion chamber, bearings, internal components, Go One
and turbocharger. This is especially important for turbo- Stop and Medium One
charged, charge air cooled engines. Go
NOTE: During engine shut down on vehicles equipped Highway Medium Warm Two
Speeds 5
with manual transmissions, it is normal for the diesel
engine to resonate heavily for a moment during engine City Traffic Maximum Three
shut off. When the engine is connected to a manual GCWR
transmission, this resonance causes load gear rattle from Highway Maximum Four
the transmission. This is commonly referred to as “shut Speeds GCWR
down rattle”. The manufacturer recommends performing Uphill Maximum Hot Five
engine shut down with the clutch pedal pushed to the Grade GCWR
floor (clutch disengaged). When engine shut down is
performed in this manner the rattle is reduced (not
eliminated).
Engine Speed Control Avoid Low Coolant Temperature Operation

Continual operation at low coolant temperature below
CAUTION! the normal range on the gauge (140°F/60°C) can be
harmful to the engine. Low coolant temperature can
Prevent overspeeding the engine going down hill. cause incomplete combustion which allows carbon and
When descending steep grades, use a combination of varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles.
gears and service brakes to control vehicle/engine Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting
speed. Overspeed can cause severe engine damage. the lubricating oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
Cooling System Tips — Automatic Transmission
Operating Precautions To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating in high ambient temperature conditions, take the
Avoid Overheating The Engine following actions:
The temperature of the coolant (a mixture of 50%
ethylene-glycol and 50% water) must not exceed the • City Driving —
normal range of the temperature gauge (240°F/116°C) when stopped, put transmission in neutral and increase
with a 16 psi (110 kPa) radiator cap. engine idle speed.
Usually the coolant temperature indicated during opera- • Highway Driving —
tion will be to the left of center in the normal range of the reduce your speed.
gauge.
• Up Steep Hills — Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed Parts

select a lower transmission gear, but try and keep the Practically all failures give some warning before the parts
torque converter clutch engaged. fail. Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds,
and visual evidence that the engine requires service.
• Air Conditioning —
Some important clues are:
turn it off temporarily.
• engine misfiring or vibrating severely
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
Pressure • sudden loss of power
When the engine is at normal operating temperature, the
• unusual engine noises 5
minimum oil pressures required are:
• fuel, oil or coolant leaks
Idle 700 to 800 RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 psi (69 kPa) • sudden change, outside the normal operating range, in
Full speed and load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 psi (207 kPa) the engine operating temperature
CAUTION! • excessive smoke
• oil pressure drop
If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings, shut
the engine off immediately. Failure to do so could
result in immediate and severe engine damage.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (GAS ENGINES)— IF DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE (ENGINE BRAKING) –
EQUIPPED IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and The exhaust brake feature will only function when the
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord driver turns the exhaust brake switch to the on position.
to a standard 110-115 volt AC electrical outlet with a Once the switch is in the on position and the vehicle is
grounded, three-wire extension cord. moving faster than 5 MPH; the exhaust brake will
automatically operate when the driver removes pressure
The engine block heater cord, on gas engines, is routed
from the accelerator pedal. Exhaust braking is most
under the hood on the driver side of the vehicle. It has a
effective when the engine RPM is higher. The automatic
removable cap that is located on the driver side of the
transmission has been programmed to downshift more
Integrated Power Module.
aggressively when the exhaust brake is enabled to in-
crease brake performance.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.

Damage to the 110-115 volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
WARNING!
Do not use the Exhaust Brake feature when driving

in icy or slippery conditions as the increased engine
braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the
vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of
vehicle control, which may cause an accident possi-
bly resulting in personal injury or death.
5
Exhaust Brake Switch

NOTE: For optimum braking power it is recommended Benefits of the exhaust brake are:
to use the Exhaust Brake while in Tow/Haul Mode.
• vehicle driving control
The purpose of the exhaust brake (engine braking) fea-
• reduced brake fade
ture is to supply negative (braking) torque to the engine.
Typically, the engine braking is used for, but not limited • longer brake life
to, vehicle towing applications where vehicle braking can
• faster cab warm-up.
be achieved by the internal engine power, thereby spar-
ing the mechanical brakes of the vehicle. The exhaust brake feature can also be used to reduce the
engine warm up time. To use the exhaust brake as a
warm-up device, the vehicle must be moving less than 5
MPH, the exhaust brake switch must be in the on
position, and the coolant temperature must below 180 F
and ambient temperature below 60 F.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
CAUTION! It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle
ing precautions are not observed:
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
a complete stop. something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on
the brake pedal.
5
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL Automatic Transmission with Overdrive (5 Speed
into any forward gear when the engine is above 545RFE) — If Equipped
idle speed. The gear shift selector display, located in the instrument
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot panel cluster, indicates the transmission gear range (the
is firmly on the brake pedal. selector is illuminated for night driving). The selector
lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column.
You must depress the brake pedal, to pull the selector
lever out of park (P) position (Brake Interlock System). To

WARNING!
drive, move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the
desired drive position. Pull the selector lever toward you Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-
when shifting into Reverse, Second, First or Park, or sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
when shifting out of Park. apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
Gear Ranges against vehicle movement and possible injury or
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or damage.
Neutral position into another gear range.
“P” Park
This gear position supplements the parking brake by WARNING!
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
this range. Never use Park while the vehicle is in motion.
it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
move the gearshift lever back and forth without first
range. Always apply parking brake first, then place the
pulling it toward you after you have set it in P. Make
selector in Park position. On 4-wheel drive vehicles be
sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle.
sure that the transfer case is in a drive position!
“N” Neutral
WARNING!
Shift to Neutral when the vehicle is standing for pro-
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or longed periods with the engine running. The engine may
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle leave the vehicle.
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You “D” Drive
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or This position provides all forward gears, including 3rd
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is gear direct and 4th or 5th gear overdrive (see Overdrive
idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on Operation). Use this range for most city and highway
the brake pedal.
5
driving.
“2” Second
“R” Reverse Use this position for driving slowly in heavy city traffic
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a or on mountain roads where more precise speed control
complete stop. is desirable. Use it also when climbing long grades, and
for engine braking when descending moderately steep
grades. To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed
45 mph (72 km/h) in this range.
“1” First • the transmission selector is in Drive;

Use this position for driving up very steep hills and for
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
engine braking at low speeds 20 mph (32 km/h) or less
perature;
when going downhill. To prevent excessive engine speed,
do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this range. • vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48
km/h);
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle in “2” Second or “1” First gear selections in high • the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” switch has not been
ambients as torque converter slip can impose significant activated;
additional heat load on the cooling system.
• transmission has reached normal operating tempera-
Overdrive Operation ture.
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec-
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-
tronically controlled fourth and fifth speed (Overdrive).
peratures, the transmission may not shift into Overdrive
The transmission will automatically shift from Drive to
and will automatically select the most desirable gear for
Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
operation at this temperature. Normal operation will
resume when the transmission fluid temperature has
risen to a suitable level. Refer also to the Note under
torque converter clutch, later in this section.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the When To Use “TOW HAUL” and “O/D OFF”
transmission will automatically select the most desirable Modes
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light
may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out
of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After
cooldown, the transmission will resume normal opera-
tion.
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive 5
if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle
speeds above approximately 35 mph (56 km/h).
Tow Haul O/D Off Switch

When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” button once to
select TOW HAUL. This will improve performance and
reduce the potential for transmission overheating or When To Lock Out Overdrive
failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
“TOW HAUL” mode, 5th gear is disabled and 2-3 and 3-4 heavy load, etc., and frequent 4–3–4 transmission shifting
shift patterns are modified. Shifts into Overdrive (4th occurs, press the “TOW/HAUL” button twice to disable
gear) are allowed during steady cruise (for improved fuel the overdrive. This will improve performance and reduce
economy) and automatic closed-throttle downshifts to the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
3rd gear (for improved braking) will occur during steady to excessive shifting.
braking. Pressing the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” button a
Torque Converter Clutch
second time to select O/D OFF will disable 4th and 5th
A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been
gear completely, which should eliminate any excessive
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
transmission shifting.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
The “TOW HAUL” or “O/D OFF” light will illuminate in cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has different feeling or response during normal operation in
been activated. Pressing the switch a third time restores high gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during
normal operation. If the “TOW HAUL” or “O/D OFF” acceleration when the transmission downshifts to second
modes are desired, the button must be pressed each time gear, the clutch automatically disengages.
the engine is started.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage Automatic Transmission (6 Speed AS68RC) — If
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm Equipped
[usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because The gear shift selector display, located in the instrument
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter panel cluster, indicates the transmission gear range (the
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission selector is illuminated for night driving). The selector
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. lever is mounted on the right side of the steering column.
Pressing the “TOW/HAUL” button, when the transmis- You must depress the brake pedal, to pull the selector
sion is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the lever out of park (P) position (Brake Interlock System). To
transmission is able to shift into and out of overdrive. drive, move the selector lever from Park or Neutral to the
desired drive position. Pull the selector lever toward you 5
NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
when shifting into Reverse, Second, First or Park, or
days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
when shifting out of Park.
transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to
the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into Gear Ranges
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not DO NOT race the engine when shifting from Park or
cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter Neutral position into another gear range.
will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into
any other gear position.
“P” Park
WARNING!
This gear position supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be started in Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
this range. Never use Park while the vehicle is in motion. it is not completely in P (Park). Check by trying to
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this move the gearshift lever back and forth without first
range. Always apply parking brake first, then place the pulling it toward you after you have set it in P. Make
selector in Park position. On 4-wheel drive vehicles be sure it is in Park before leaving the vehicle.
sure that the transfer case is in a drive position!
WARNING!
Never use Park position on an automatic transmis-

sion as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
“N” Neutral
WARNING!
Shift to Neutral when the vehicle is standing for pro-
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or longed periods with the engine running. The engine may
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle leave the vehicle.
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You “D” Drive
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or This position provides all forward gears, including 4th
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is gear direct and 5th or 6th (if equipped) gear overdrive
idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on (see Overdrive Operation). Use this range for most city
the brake pedal.
5
and highway driving.
“3” Third
“R” Reverse Use this position for driving in slight heavy city traffic or
Use this range only after the vehicle has come to a on mountain roads where more precise speed control is
complete stop. desirable. Use it also when climbing long grades, and for
engine braking when descending moderately steep
grades. To prevent excessive engine speed do not exceed
40 mph (64 km/h) in this range.
“2” Second (Overdrive). The transmission will automatically shift

Use this position for driving on more severe conditions from Drive to Overdrive if the following conditions are
and lower speeds than “3” third. To prevent excessive present:
engine speed do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this
• the transmission selector is in Drive;
range.
• the engine coolant has reached normal operating tem-
“1” First
perature;
Use this position for driving up very steep hills and for
engine braking at low speeds 12 mph (19 km/h) or less • vehicle speed is above approximately 38 mph (61
when going downhill. To prevent excessive engine speed, km/h) for 5th gear and 55 mph (89 km/h) for 6th gear;
do not exceed 12 mph (19 km/h) in this range.
• the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” switch has not been
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded activated;
vehicle in “2” Second or “1” First gear selections in high
• transmission has reached normal operating tempera-
ambients as torque converter slip can impose significant
ture.
additional heat load on the cooling system.
NOTE: If the vehicle is started in extremely cold tem-
Overdrive Operation
peratures, the transmission shift schedule initially re-
The overdrive automatic transmission contains an elec-
stricts transmission operation in forward gear ranges to
tronically controlled 5th and 6th (if equipped) speed
3rd gear until the transmission fluid temperature rises to
a suitable level. During this condition, the ability of the When To Use “TOW HAUL” and “O/D OFF”
vehicle to accelerate under heavily loaded conditions Modes
may be reduced. Refer also to the Note under torque
converter clutch, later in this section.
If the transmission temperature gets extremely hot, the
transmission will automatically select the most desirable
gear for operation at this temperature. If the transmission
temperature becomes hot enough the TRANS TEMP light
may illuminate and the transmission may downshift out 5
of Overdrive until the transmission cools down. After
cooldown, the transmission will resume normal opera-
tion.
The transmission will downshift from Overdrive to Drive
if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed at vehicle Tow Haul O/D Off Switch
speeds above approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) for 6th to When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
5th and 29 mph (47 km/h) for 5th to 4th. heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the “TOW HAUL O/D OFF” button once to
select TOW HAUL. This will improve performance and
reduce the potential for transmission overheating or

WARNING!
failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in
“TOW HAUL” mode, 6th gear (if equipped) is disabled Do not use the Tow/Haul feature when driving in icy
and 2-3 and 3-4 and 4–5 shift patterns are modified. Shifts or slippery conditions as the increased engine brak-
into Overdrive (5th gear) are allowed during steady ing can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle
cruise (for improved fuel economy). Pressing the “TOW to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle
HAUL O/D OFF” button a second time to select O/D control, which may cause an accident possibly result-
OFF will disable 5th and 6th gear completely, which ing in personal injury or death.
should eliminate any excessive transmission shifting.
The “TOW HAUL” or “O/D OFF” light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster to indicate when the switch has When To Lock Out Overdrive
been activated. Pressing the switch a third time restores When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
normal operation. If the “TOW HAUL” or “O/D OFF” heavy load, etc., and frequent 6–5–6 or 5–4–5 transmis-
modes are desired, the button must be pressed each time sion shifting occurs, press the “TOW/HAUL” button.
the engine is started. This will improve performance and reduce the potential
for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive
shifting.
Torque Converter Clutch NOTE: If the vehicle has not been driven in several
A feature, designed to improve fuel economy, has been days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati- the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
different feeling or response during normal operation in cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter
high gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during will refill within five seconds of shifting from Park into
acceleration when the transmission downshifts to 1st any other gear position.
gear, the clutch automatically disengages.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION 5
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm WARNING!
[usually after 1-3 miles (1.6 - 4.8 km) of driving]. Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter You or others could be injured if you leave the
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission vehicle unattended without having the parking
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
Pressing the “TOW/HAUL” button, when the transmis- ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
sion is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the especially on an incline.
transmission is able to shift into and out of overdrive.
Truck models with manual transmission are equipped Manual Transmission — 6 Speed (G56)
with a clutch interlocking ignition system. The clutch Your vehicle may be equipped with the G56 manual
pedal must be fully depressed to start the vehicle. transmission. This transmission has a “creeper” 1st gear
which should be used to start from a standing position
Fully depress the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As
when carrying a payload or towing a trailer. Damage to
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera-
the clutch can result from starting in 2nd or 3rd gear with
tor pedal.
a loaded vehicle. An unloaded vehicle may be launched
To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depress in 2nd gear. Use each gear in numerical order – do not
the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to skip a gear.
stop. Move the shift lever from the Neutral position
For most city driving you may find it easier to use only
straight across and back into Reverse.
1st through 5th gear ranges. For steady highway driving
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or with light accelerations, 6th gear is recommended. To
attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal shift into 5th gear, move the shift lever to the right
partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on beyond the spring pressure point and push it forward.
the clutch. When shifting from 5th to 4th gear, pull the lever down
toward you in one motion. Do not pull the lever sharply
left as you may shift accidentally into 2nd gear and
damage the transmission.
To shift into Reverse, come to a complete stop. Depress 6 Speed Manual Transmission Shift Speeds
the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to Engine 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
stop. Reverse has a “crash-through” lockout feature.
5.7L 15 mph 25 mph 40 mph 45 mph 50 mph
Move the shift lever from the Neutral position straight
Gas (24 (40 (64 (72 (81
across, in one swift motion, and down into Reverse. Engine km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h)
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both 6 Speed Manual Transmission Shift Speeds
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as Engine 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the 6.7L 5
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts 7 mph 15 mph 25 mph 40 mph 45 mph
Turbo
during cruise conditions (steady speeds) will result in (11 (24 (40 (64 (72
Diesel
increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated. km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h)
Engine
Downshifting – Gas Engine To prevent clutch and transmission damage, your vehicle
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is should be downshifted at speeds no greater than those
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down listed in the Maximum Recommended Downshifting
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time Speed chart.
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
Maximum Recommended Downshifting Speeds
speed. For acceleration at speeds less than 20 mph (30
km/h), 2nd gear is recommended. Gear
Selec- 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th
CAUTION! tion
Maxi- 20 mph 35 mph 55 mph 75 mph 85 mph
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift mum (32 (56 (88 (120 (135
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine Speed km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h)
which can cause valve damage. Downshifting – Diesel Engine
Failure to follow the recommended downshifting Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
speeds may cause the engine to over speed and / or recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
depressed. provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch. For accelera- Maximum Recommended Downshifting Speeds
tion at speeds less than 15 mph (25 km/h), 2nd gear is Gear
recommended. Selec- 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th
tion
CAUTION! Maxi- 10 mph 19 mph 32 mph 50 mph 68 mph
mum (16 (31 (51 (80 (109
When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift Speed km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h) km/h)
one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine
which can cause valve damage. FOUR-WHEEL-DRIVE OPERATION — IF
Failure to follow the recommended downshifting
EQUIPPED 5
Four-Wheel-Drive Dodge Ram Trucks are equipped with
speeds may cause the engine to over speed and / or
either a Manually Shifted transfer case or an Electroni-
damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is
cally Shifted transfer case. See the operating instructions
depressed.
for your transfer case, located within this section.
Manually Shifted Transfer Case Operating
To prevent clutch and transmission damage, your vehicle Information/Precautions
should be downshifted at speeds no greater than those The transfer case provides 4 mode positions - 2 (rear)-
listed in the Maximum Recommended Downshifting wheel-drive high range, 4-wheel-drive high range, neu-
Speed chart. tral, and 4-wheel-drive low range.
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2-wheel- When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is
drive position (2H) for normal street and highway con- approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions
ditions such as dry hard surfaced roads. at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
When additional traction is required the transfer case 4H
and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear Proper operation of 4-wheel-drive vehicles depends on
driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can
simply moving the shift lever to the desired positions. cause damage to the transfer case.
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on
front or rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear
equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and
and damage to the driveline components.
rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
The 4-wheel-drive light (4WD), located in the instrument place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
cluster, alerts the driver that the vehicle is in 4-wheel spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are locked
Because 4-wheel drive provides improved traction, there
together. This light illuminates when the transfer case is
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
shifted to either the 4H or 4L positions. There is no light
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
for the 2H or N (Neutral) positions.
NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be For additional information on the appropriate use of each
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire transfer case mode position see the information below:
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold tempera-
2H
tures.
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
WARNING!
4H
You or others could be injured if you leave the 4-Wheel-Drive High Range - Locks the front and rear
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, 5
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position slippery road surfaces only.
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move N
regardless of the transmission position. The parking Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
brake should always be applied when the driver is from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
not in the vehicle. another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more infor-
mation.
4L Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted Transfer

4-Wheel-Drive Low Range - Low speed 4-wheel-drive. Case
Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h). Vehicle’s equipped with the AISIN
(AS68RC) Automatic Transmission, Overdrive gear (5th
and 6th) will be disabled when the transfer case is in
4L.
Manual Transfer Case Shifter

2H ⇔ 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,
shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage / disen- NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
gage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty may oc-
pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant force cur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly
when shifting the transfer case lever. aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch
teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The pre-
2H or 4H ⇔ 4L
ferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
an automatic transmission to N (Neutral) or depress the
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5
clutch on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is
km/h).
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer 5
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in NOTE: Do not attempt to shift to or from 4L while the
transfer case N (Neutral). transmission is in gear or clutch is engaged.
NOTE: Pausing in transfer case N (Neutral) in vehicles Transfer Case Reminder Light
equipped with an automatic transmission may require The four-wheel-drive operating light (4WD), located in
shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while the instrument cluster, is used to alert the driver that the
completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift automatic front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are
transmission to N (Neutral), hold foot on brake, and turn driving.
engine OFF. Make shift to the desired mode.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating This Electronically Shifted transfer case provides 4 mode
Information/Precautions (4 Position Switch) — If positions: 2 (rear) wheel drive high range, 4 wheel drive
Equipped lock range, 4 wheel drive low range, and neutral.
The Electronically Shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the 2 wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions (dry hard surfaced roads).
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
desired position - see Shifting Procedure section for
specific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD
LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road
Transfer Case Switch surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW
This is an electric shift transfer case and is operated by positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in-
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo-
located on the instrument panel. nents.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights —

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case Only
Transfer case position indicator lights are located in the
instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired
transfer case selection. When you select a different trans-
fer case position, the indicator lights will do the follow-
ing:
If All Shift Conditions are Met
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF. 5
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
NOTE: The transfer case Neutral (N) position is selected
by depressing the recessed button located on the lower 3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
case Neutral (N) position is to be used for recreational
towing only. See the Recreational Towing section for
specific procedures on shifting into and out of Neutral
(N).
If One or More Shift Conditions are not Met The “SERVICE 4WD” warning light monitors the electric
shift 4WD system. If this light remains on after engine
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the
ON.
4WD system is not functioning properly and that service
2. The newly selected position indicator light will con- is required.
tinue to flash.
WARNING!
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all Always engage the parking brake when powering
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer down the vehicle if the (Service 4WD( light is illu-
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn minated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow
the control knob back to the current position, wait five (5) the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury.
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the 9Shifting Procedure9 for your transfer
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual. NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine

WARNING!
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care You or others could be injured if you leave the
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
(40 km/h). Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the
Proper operation of 4 wheel drive vehicles depends on parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
transfer case. regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
5
Because 4 wheel drive provides improved traction, there not in the vehicle.
is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds.
Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position see the information below:
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - Normal street and
highway driving. Dry hard surfaced roads.
4WD LOCK Shifting Procedure — Electronically Shifted

4 Wheel Drive Lock Range - Locks the front and rear Transfer Case
driveshafts together. Forces the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose,
slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
4 Wheel Drive Low Range - Low speed 4 wheel drive.
Locks the front and rear driveshafts together. Forces the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
Additional traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
N
Neutral - Disengages both the front and rear driveshafts Transfer Case Switch
from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind NOTE: If any of the requirements to select a new
another vehicle. See Recreational Towing for more infor- transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case
mation. will not shift.The indicator light for the previous position
will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator
light will continue to flash until all the requirements for ignition key must be in the ON position with the engine
the selected position have been met. To retry a shift: either RUNNING or OFF. This shift cannot be completed
return the control knob back to the original position, if the key is in the accessory position.
make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait
NOTE: The 4x4 system will not allow shifts between
five (5) seconds and try the shift again.
2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels are
NOTE: If all the requirements to select a new transfer spinning (no traction). In this situation the selected
case position have been met, the current position indica- position indicator light will flash and the original posi-
tor light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator tion indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce
light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift. 5
When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
2WD or 4WD LOCK⇔ 4WD LOW
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some
2WD⇔ 4WD LOCK
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3
motion, the transfer case will engage / disengage faster if mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. USE EITHER
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn- OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES:
ing the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
Preferred Procedure 3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
1. With engine RUNNING, slow vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3
to 5 km/h). 4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (depress clutch
on manual transmissions).
NOTE: If steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
switch to the desired position.
then the desired position indicator light will flash con-
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not tinuously while the original position indicator light is
flashing), shift transmission back into gear (release clutch ON, until all requirements have been met.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
Alternate Procedure place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
If the key is not ON then the shift will not take place and
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
2. With the key ON and the engine either OFF or
NOTE: If your are leaving your vehicle stored for longer
RUNNING, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (de-
than 21 days, refer to the section on “Vehicle Storage.”
press clutch on manual transmissions).
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL — IF EQUIPPED

WARNING!
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differen-
there is a difference between the traction characteristics tial, never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
of the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During ground, since the vehicle may drive through the rear
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit per- wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose
forms similarly to a conventional differential. On slip- control of the vehicle.
pery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of
the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better
traction. Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when 5
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
will supply maximum traction. When starting with only turn.
one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight
momentary application of the parking brake may be
necessary to gain maximum traction.
POWER TAKE OFF OPERATION – IF EQUIPPED • Parking brake applied (vehicles equipped with
The Dodge Chassis Cab vehicle, when equipped with manual transmission)
either the automatic 6 speed or manual G-56 6 speed
• Vehicle must be running
transmissions, will allow for an aftermarket upfit with a
transmission driven PTO (power take off). The customer • No vehicle, brake or clutch switch faults present
will have the ability to operate the PTO in either a
• PTO must be correctly installed using the vehicle
“stationary” or “mobile” mode. The vehicles will be
provided circuits
factory set to the “stationary” mode. In order to select the
“mobile” mode a DaimlerChrysler Dealership is required The customer has the choice to operate the PTO by
to modify the vehicles settings using their proprietary utilizing the cruise control switches or by utilizing a
Dealer service tool. remote control (provided by the PTO supplier). To oper-
ate the feature using the cruise control switches the
Stationary Mode
customer must first activate the up fitter provided on/off
To operate the PTO in this mode the vehicle must meet switch. Next, the cruise control “on” switch is selected.
the following conditions: Following this step the “set” switch must be depressed.
The vehicle is now in the PTO mode and is ready for use.
• Be in “park” position (vehicles equipped with auto-
In order to increase or decrease the engine idle speed, to
matic transmission)
optimize the PTO function, the “accel” and “decel” cruise
• Upfitter provider (on/off) switch has been activated switches can be used respectively. To disengage PTO
operation and return to “standard vehicle operation” • Dealer selected “mobile” mode activated via Dealer
simply turn the up fitter provided on/off switch to the off proprietary service tool
position or press the “cancel” cruise switch.
• Upfitter provider (on/off) switch has been activated
To operate the PTO via a remote switch the customer
• Vehicle must be in “park” or “drive” position (vehicles
must make sure the above conditions are met. It is vital
equipped with automatic transmission)
for proper operation that the PTO and remote have been
installed correctly paying special attention to ensure the • Parking brake must not be applied
vehicle provided wiring has been connected properly.
• No vehicle, brake or clutch switch faults present
This is the responsibility of the installer of the PTO and 5
switches/remote system. It is the responsibility of the • Vehicle must be running
PTO manufacturer to ensure that their electrical (switches
• PTO must be correctly installed using the vehicle
and remote) system is compatible with the vehicle’s
provided circuits
electrical architecture and software functionality.
The customer may choose to use the PTO while the
Mobile Mode
vehicle is moving. To do so the PTO function must be
To operate the PTO in this mode the vehicle must meet activated prior to taking the vehicle out of “park”. This is
the following conditions: accomplished by activating the up fitter provided PTO
on/off switch. At this point the customer may place the
vehicle in a forward or reverse gear and have PTO
operation. To disengage PTO operation and return to DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

“standard vehicle operation” simply turn the up fitter When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
provided on/off switch to the off position. wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
NOTE: For application specific information with respect
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
to PTO and pump requirements and additional vehicle
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
information (wiring schematics, preset idle values, en-
tions should be observed:
gine speed limits, and vehicle hardware and software
requirements) please refer to the Dodge Body Builders 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
Guide by accessing “www.dodge.com/bodybuilder” and slushy.
choosing the appropriate links.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
Power Take Off – Aftermarket Installation
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
If you did not order the PTO (Power Take Off) Prep
visible.
Package from the factory and want to convert your
vehicle, refer to the Body Builders Guide at 4. Keep tires properly inflated.
www.dodge.com/bodybuilder or contact the manufac-
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
turer directly at [email protected] (e-mail), 866–205–
the car in front to avoid a collision in a sudden stop.
4102 (toll free) or 313–493–2020.
6. Do not use trailer tow mode on vehicle’s with the Flowing/Rising Water
AISIN 6 speed automatic transmission (6.7L Diesel En-
gine only). WARNING!
DRIVING THROUGH WATER Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water
Driving through water more than a few inches deep will is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent dam- ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
age to your vehicle. and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this 5
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following before
doing so:
CAUTION! WARNING!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing water • Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8
on the vehicle. km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that is
under water and if there are any obstacles in the way • Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
before driving through the standing water. cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
your vehicle’s fluids (i.e. engine oil, transmission, axle,
etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e. fluid that is milky or • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
foamy in appearance) after driving through standing cause it to lockup and stall out and leave you
water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid
appears contaminated, as this may result in further stranded.
damage. Such damage is not covered by the new vehicle
limited warranty. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
lockup and stall out and cause serious internal damage to passengers, and others around you.
the engine. Such damage is not covered by the new
vehicle limited warranty.
DRIVING OFF-ROAD NOTE: After off-road usage, particularly in sand or

Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep mud, inspect the underside of the vehicle for accumu-
hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural lated dirt at the propeller shaft, axles, U-joints, brake
obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill, rotors and calipers.
choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.
Use a hose to clean off any accumulation of dirt or mud.
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously. Check the exhaust system and all exposed components
for any sign of damage.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL, or If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, 5
diagonally across the hill. slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for im-
pacted material. Impacted foreign material can cause a
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain,
wheel imbalance. Removing the foreign material from
shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator
the wheels will correct the situation.
slowly to avoid spinning the wheels.
DO NOT REDUCE the tire pressures for this type of
driving.
PARKING BRAKE
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
NOTE: The instrument cluster red brake warning light
will come on and flash to indicate that the parking brake
is applied. You must be sure that the parking brake is
fully applied before leaving the vehicle.
Parking Brake Release

Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked and
the gear shift lever is in the PARK position. When
parking on a hill you should apply the parking brake
before placing the gear shift lever in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the selector out of PARK.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the

WARNING!
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav- uphill grade.
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage The parking brake should always be applied whenever
or injury. Also be certain to leave an automatic the driver is not in the vehicle.
transmission in Park, a manual transmission in
Reverse or First gear. Failure to do so may allow BRAKE SYSTEM
the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving 5
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in If either the front or rear hydraulic systems lose normal
the ignition. A child could operate power win- capability, the remaining system will still function with
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged evident by increased pedal travel during application,
before driving, failure to do so can lead to brake greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activa-
problems due to excessive heating of the rear tion of the BRAKE warning lamp and the ABS lamp (if
brakes. equipped) during brake use.
Brake Noise Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System

During normal operation of the brake system certain
noises may be present from time to time. Occasional WARNING!
9groan9 or 9squeal9 noises may occur during normal
operation of the brake system which may not be indica- Anti-Lock Brake Systems contain sophisticated elec-
tive of a problem. These noises may be heard at any time tronic equipment. It may be susceptible to interfer-
the brakes are applied but may be more noticeable during ence caused by improperly installed or high output
the first few brake applications in the morning. Moisture, radio transmitting equipment. This interference can
hot or cold temperature, dust, and or other debris may cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability.
also contribute to the noise condition. Repeated or con- Installation of such equipment should be performed
tinuous noises during braking may be an indication that by qualified professionals.
the brake linings are worn and in need of replacement.
This Anti-lock Brake System is designed to aid the driver

WARNING!
in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural conditions. The system operates with a separate com-
laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can puter to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond lockup and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to
brakes and tires or the traction afforded. provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including makes a low humming noise during operation. This is
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, normal. 5
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro- When you are in a severe braking condition involving
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver use of the Anti-lock Brake System, you will experience
can prevent accidents. some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous system and is normal.
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
Engagement of the Anti-lock Brake System may be
or the safety of others.
accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a
clicking noise. These occurrences are normal, and indi-
cate that the system is functioning.
ABS Warning Light POWER STEERING

The Anti-lock Brake System includes an amber warning The standard power steering system will give you good
light, located in the instrument cluster. When the light is vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
illuminated, the Anti-lock Brake System is not function- in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
ing. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason, the power assist is interrupted, it will
WARNING!
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish their tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly parking maneuvers.
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
stop. wheel travel are considered normal and does not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short period of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and does not in any
way damage the steering system.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

WARNING!
Tire Markings
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
5
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and should be avoided when pos-
sible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.
NOTE: • LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex- letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ample: P215/65R15 95H. ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European • Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
the section width. The letter 9P9 is absent from this tire molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
(....blank....( = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm) 5
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—9R9 means Radial Construction.
—9D9 means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
(....blank....( = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN) located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you
white sidewalls will have the full TIN including date code will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use. 5
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information

This placard tells you important information about the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
Tire Placard Location 4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You the weight referenced here.
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec- pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
tion of this manual. your vehicle’s placard.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and 5
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
calculated in Step 4. and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
kg).
5
1. Safety—
WARNING!
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and cause accidents.
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never in tire failure.
overload them. • Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
Tire Pressure
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary loss of vehicle control.
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
2. Economy— Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases Information” section of this manual.
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump-
tion.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. 5
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Tire Placard Location

The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as (1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to sure molded into the tire sidewall.
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
temperature changes.
CAUTION! Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12 °F (7 °C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This the winter.
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Example: If garage temperature = 68 °F (20 °C) and the
outside temperature = 32 °F (0 °C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 °F (7 °C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) Inflation Pressure Adjustment When Mounted to
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure Vehicle
build up or your tire pressure will be too low. During procedures when adding tire inflation pressure,
the technician or individual must utilize a remote infla-
Tire Inflation Pressure — 4500/5500 with Steel
tion devise, and ensure that all persons are clear of the
Carcass Ply Tires
trajectory area. See figure below.
This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewall. As
such, they cannot be treated like normal light truck tires.
Adjusting tire pressure must be performed by personnel
trained, supervised and equipped accordingly. 5
4500/5500 Tire Inflation

When adjusting inflation pressure to a tire and wheel Inflation Pressure Adjustment When Not Mounted to
assembly mounted on a vehicle, use Remote Mount Vehicle
Automatic Inflation Kit (similar to model number 27- When adjusting inflation pressure to a tire and wheel
cc1021234, available from TEAM PSE – PENTASTAR assembly not mounted on a vehicle, use a Remote Mount
Service Equipment Phone Number 1-800-734-4334. Automatic Inflation Kit and a Tire Inflation Cage similar
to model number #174-2240 available from TEAM PSE
NOTE: Never attempt to re-inflate a tire and wheel
(PENTASTAR Service Equipment – 1-800-223-5623).
assembly which has been run flat or extremely under
inflated without first removing the tire from the wheel Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
assembly for inspection. The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds 5
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
Personnel trained, supervised, and equipped according
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
to Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administra-
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
tion (OSHA).
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- WARNING!

mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
mph (120 km/h).
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in

the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

WARNING!
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire, limited use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the (or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
vehicle at the first opportunity. and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
5
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in Section 6 of this

manual for additional information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30
mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and don’t let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
Tread Wear Indicators becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced. Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
factors including but not limited to: with oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
• Tire pressure
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
• Distance driven wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
WARNING! lent to the originals in size, quality and performance 5
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, “Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You The service description and load identification will be
could lose control and have an accident resulting in found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
serious injury or death. equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING! CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus- may result in false speedometer and odometer
pension dimensions and performance characteris- readings.
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen- Alignment And Balance
sion components. You could lose control and have Poor suspension alignment may result in:
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings • Fast tire wear.
approved for your vehicle.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped wear.
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load • Vehicle pull to right or left.
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident. Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire for proper diagnosis.
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.

CAUTION!
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains, observe
the following precautions:
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
• Because of limited chain clearance between tires and other
suspension components, it is important that only chains in
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious
— IF EQUIPPED vehicle damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen- occurs that could suggest chain breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the chain before further use.
gers {150 lbs (68 kg) each} plus 200 lbs (91kg) of cargo. • Install chains as tightly as possible and then retighten
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle after driving about 1/2 mile (0.8 km). 5
will be found on the face of the driver’s door. • Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
TIRE CHAINS bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Use “Class U” chains on Ram Trucks, or other traction • Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2
vehicles.
aids that meet SAE Type “U” specifications.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, • Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on
as recommended by the chain manufacturer. method of installation, operating speed, and condi-
tions for usage. Always use the lower suggested oper-
ating speed of the chain manufacturer if different than
the speed recommended by the manufacturer.
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-

CAUTION!
ing link and cable (radial) chains.
Tire chain use is permitted only on the rear tires of Ram Do not use tire chains on the 4X2 front wheels of
4X2 trucks. SRW (Single Rear Wheels) equipped with LT245/
70R17, LT265/70R17 tires or 4X4 front tires of Ram
NOTE: The use of class “U” chains is permitted on the Trucks equipped with LT265/70R17tires. There may
front and rear of 4X4, Ram Trucks with Dual Rear Wheels not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are
and LT235/80R17E tires. risking structural or body damage to your vehicle.
NOTE: On 4X2 Ram Trucks, class “U” snow chains are
permitted on the rear wheels only of vehicles equipped
with LT245/70R17, LT265/70R17, and LT235/80R17 size SNOW TIRES
tires. Snow tires should be of the same size and type construc-
tion as the front tires. Consult the manufacturer of the
NOTE: On 4X4 Single Rear Wheel (SRW) Ram Trucks, snow tire to determine any maximum vehicle speed
class “U” snow chains are permitted on the rear wheels requirement associated with the tire. These tires should
only of vehicles equipped with LT265/70R17. always be operated at the vehicle maximum capacity
inflation pressures under any load condition.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
checked before using these tire types.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. 5
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-
tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride. NOTE: On Canadian vehicles only, if your Ram truck is
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your equipped with All-Season type tires on the front and
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules” ON/OFF Road type tires mounted on the rear, do not use
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permissible a front to back rotation pattern. Instead, rotate your tires
side to side at the recommended intervals.
Dual Rear Wheels

CAUTION!
3500/4500/5500 Dual Rear Tires have only one ap-

proved direction of rotation. This is to accommodate
the asymmetrical design (tread pattern) of the ON/
OFF road tire and the use of Outline White Letter
(OWL) tires.
• When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to
be remounted on the rim or installed at a different
location to maintain the correct placement of the
tire on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position
on the truck. For example, if the spare is used to
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be replace an outer rear tire it will have to be re-
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set. mounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished
To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all inward. That way the tread design of asymmetrical
four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires. tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will
maintain proper position.
ENGINE RUNAWAY FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Fuel Requirements (5.7L Gas Engines)
WARNING!
The 5.7L engine is designed to meet all
In case of engine runaway due to flammable fumes emissions regulations and provide satisfac-
from gasoline spills or turbocharger oil leaks being tory fuel economy and performance when
sucked into the engine do the following to help avoid using high quality unleaded gasoline hav-
personal injury and/or vehicle damage: ing an octane range of 87 to 89. The manu-
facturer recommends the use of 89 octane
1. Shut off engine ignition switch. for optimum performance. The routine use of premium 5
2. Using a CO2 or dry chemical type fire extin- gasoline is not recommended. The use of premium
guisher, direct the spray from the fire extinguisher gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality regular
into the grille on the passenger side so that the spray and mid-grade gasolines, and in some circumstances
enters the engine air intake. may result in poorer performance.
The inlet for the engine air intake is located behind Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
the passenger side headlamp and receives air your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
through the grille high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard We strongly support the use of reformulated gasolines.
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide
symptoms, try another brand of “regular” gasoline be- excellent performance and durability for the engine and
fore considering service for the vehicle. fuel system components.
Over 40 auto manufacturers world-wide have issued and Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World- Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE and ETBE. Oxygen-
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance ates are required in some areas of the country during the
and durability for your vehicle. We recommend the use winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
are available. your vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
CAUTION!
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe- Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- and driveability problems and may damage critical
prove air quality. fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or It is even more important to look for gasolines without
E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from higher than allowed in the United States. MMT is pro-
Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Metha- hibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
nol.
Materials Added To Fuel
MMT In Gasoline All gasolines sold in the United States are required to
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasolines detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
blended with MMT provide no performance advantage conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There- 5
beyond gasolines of the same octane number without fore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT reduce spark plug
Fuel System Cautions
life and reduce emission system performance. We recom-
mend that gasolines free of MMT be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gaso- Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
line retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains performance:
MMT.
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance, resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
damage the emission control system. the responsibility of the manufacturer.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or against you.
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
WARNING!
• When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded
vehicle when the humidity is low and the temperature Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
is high, use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
spark knock. If spark knock persists, lighten the load, monoxide poisoning:
or engine piston damage may result.
• The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
octane enhancers is not recommended. Many of these monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
products contain high concentrations of methanol. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is to avoid damage to the emissions control system. For
stopped in an open area with the engine running for most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good perfor-
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. mance. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below
20°F or -7°C), or is required to operate at colder-than-
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
normal conditions for prolonged periods, use climatized
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50%
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better protection from
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
windows fully open. 5
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to WARNING!
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle. Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions
Fuel Requirements (6.7L Diesel Engines) and hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in fuel.
your vehicle. Federal law requires that you must fuel this
vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15
ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low
Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum)
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To prevent NOTE: A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting
fuel system trouble, drain the accumulated water from ASTM specification D-6751 may be used with your
the fuel/water separator using the fuel/water separator Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle.
drain provided. If you buy good quality fuel and follow
NOTE: In addition, commercially available fuel addi-
the cold weather advice above, fuel conditioners should
tives are not necessary for the proper operation of your
not be required in your vehicle. If available in your area,
Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle.
a high cetane “premium” diesel fuel may offer improved
cold-starting and warm-up performance. NOTE: No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should only
be used where extended arctic conditions (-10°F or -23°C)
Fuel Specifications
exist.
The Cummins Turbocharged, Charge Air Cooled, Diesel
engine has been developed to take advantage of the high
energy content and generally lower cost No. 2 Ultra Low
Sulfur diesel fuel or No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur climatized
diesel fuels. Experience has shown that it also operates
on No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuels or other fuels
within specification.
ADDING FUEL
CAUTION!
Adding Fuel (Gas Engines)
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
CAUTION! off” the fuel tank after filling.
Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-

tem could result from using an improper fuel tank NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let fuel tank is full.
impurities into the fuel system. Also a poorly fitted
after-market cap can cause the MIL (Malfunction WARNING! 5
Indicator Light) to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system. • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
CAUTION! • Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running. This is in violation of most state and
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction federal fire regulations and will cause the Mal-
Indicator Light to turn on. function Indicator Light to turn on.
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap 1/4 turn until you hear one Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
click. This is an indication that the cap is properly If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel
tightened. filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
GASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the Malfunction
cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is
Indicator Light will come on, Be sure the gas cap is
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the
message off. If the problem persists, the message will
WARNING!
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You in a row, the system will turn on the Malfunction
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn
ground while filling. the MIL light off.
Adding Fuel (Diesel Engines)

WARNING!
CAUTION! A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is on a truck bed. You could be burned.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
Always place fuel containers on the ground while
off” the fuel tank after filling.
filling.
NOTE:
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel 5
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
tank is full.
cap is for use with this vehicle.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is properly CAUTION!
tightened.
Damage to the fuel system or emission control sys-
• Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the tem could result from using an improper fuel tank
vehicle is refueled. filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.
Bulk Fuel Storage

WARNING!
If you store quantities of fuel, good maintenance of the
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near stored fuel is also essential. Fuel contaminated with
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the water will promote the growth of “microbes.” These
tank filled. microbes form “slime” that will clog fuel filters and lines.
Drain condensation from the supply tank and change the
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is line filter on a regular basis.
running.
NOTE: When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of
fuel, air is pulled into the fuel system.
Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel
You may try priming as described below. However, if the
Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can cause
engine will not start, refer to the fuel priming procedure
severe damage to the engine fuel system. Proper main-
in the Service Manual or have the vehicle towed to an
tenance of the engine fuel filter and fuel tank is essential.
authorized Dodge dealer.
(See Section 7 for Maintenance Procedures).
NOTE: Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel is a
blend of Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur and Number 1 Ultra
Low Sulfur Diesel fuel which reduces the temperature at
which wax crystals form in the fuel.
4. Repeat the procedure if the engine does not start.

WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the CAUTION!
engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel
Do not engage the starter motor for more than 15
pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious
seconds at a time. Allow two minutes between the
injury or death.
cranking intervals.
Priming if the engine has run out of fuel

NOTE: The engine may run rough until the air is forced 5
1. Add a substantial quantity of fuel to the tank 5 to 10 from all the fuel lines.
gallons (19 to 38L).
VEHICLE LOADING
2. Crank the engine for 1 to 2 seconds. If the engine does
not start, then release the key or starter button back to the Certification Label
RUN position (do not turn the key back to the OFF As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
position). The electric fuel transfer pump will continue to istration Regulations, your vehicle has a certification
run and purge air from the system for about 20 seconds. label affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
After 20 seconds, attempt to start the engine again. This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
3. Start the engine using the Normal Starting Procedure. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
bottom of the label is your Vehicle Identification Number
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
(VIN).
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and cle’s GVWR.
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
Tire Size
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
The tire size on the Label represents the actual tire size on
Payload your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load capacity of this tire size.
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
Rim Size
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
all loading conditions up to full GAWR. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
Curb Weight
properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a 5
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
added.
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Loading
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
the brakes operate.
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
can be computed after the vehicle has been weighed

CAUTION!
both in its (curb weight( condition, and in its (loaded
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR and ready for operation( condition.
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 6500 LBS.
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
An EXAMPLE of a loaded vehicle is shown in the

following chart. Note that neither GVWR nor GAWR
capabilities are exceeded. Overloading can cause poten-
tial safety hazards and shorten service life.
NOTE: The weights shown in this chart are not
necessarily the weights for your vehicle. Also, the
amount of load added to both the front and rear axles
TRAILER TOWING Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

In this section you will find safety tips and information The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re- (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and 9loaded and ready for operation9 condition. The recom-
safely as possible. mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
must be supported by the scale.
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) 5
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
Common Towing Definitions
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in-
you in understanding the following information:
clude a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) driver).
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Frontal Area

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles a trailer.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Trailer Sway Control
rear GAWR.
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
WARNING!
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition swaying motions while traveling.
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose Weight-Carrying Hitch
control of the vehicle and have an accident. A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
Tongue Weight (TW) hitches are the most popular on the market today and
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or trailers.
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
WARNING!
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to system may reduce handling, stability, braking per-
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When formance, and could result in an accident.
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your hitch
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and Vehicle dealer for additional information. 5
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
Weight Distributing Hitch System Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System

Fifth-Wheel Hitch tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
A special high platform with a coupling that mounts over correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. Connects Refer to “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin. Weight Ratings)” for the website address that contains
the necessary information for your specific drivetrain.
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm Trailer Hitch Classification
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup Class Max. GTW
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted (Gross Trailer Wt.)
over the rear axle in the truck bed. Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 5
Class II - Medium 3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Trailer Hitch Classification
Duty
The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2,000
lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory Class IV - Extra 10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000 Heavy Duty
lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. Fifth Wheel/ Greater than 10,000 lbs
See your dealer for package content. Gooseneck (4540 kg)
The following chart provides the industry standard for All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
Ratings) your bumper or trailer hitch.
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
• http:// www.dodge.com/towing.
• http:// www.dodge.ca (Canada).
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side Consider the following items when computing the
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
many trailer accidents.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment

CAUTION!
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers. • Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the your vehicle.
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, • During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
must be considered as part of the total load on your towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual. 5
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
Towing Requirements manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv- or GCWR, ratings.
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
• Safety chains must always be used between your

WARNING!
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
as safe as possible: slack for turning corners.
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
and will not shift during travel. When trailering When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to P for Park. With a manual transmission, shift the
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and transmission into reverse. And with four-wheel-drive
have an accident. vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in neutral.
Always, block or 9chock9 the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a • Total weight must be distributed between the tow
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas- ratings are not exceeded:
sis structure or tires.
1. GVWR
2. GTW − Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage

before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
3. GAWR
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
− When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor-
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
percentage of total trailer weight).
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
Towing Requirements — Tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits. 5
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire. Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe − Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
Tires–General Information section of this manual on This could cause inadequate braking and possible
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures. personal injury.
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is

WARNING!
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
brake controller is not required. tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 when you need them and could have an accident.
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
lbs (907 kg). tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
CAUTION! of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. motoring safety.
Twelve trailer tow circuits are provided at the rear of the
chassis. These circuits are unterminated and sealed.
Seven of the twelve circuits are the standard 7 pin trailer

WARNING!
wiring circuits. Three of the twelve circuits are upfitter
circuits used for aftermarket applications. Two of the Any work done to the vehicles electrical system, or
twelve circuits are additional trailer circuits. For addi- wiring, should be performed by a qualified automo-
tional information about trailer tow circuits or other tive technician, if done improperly it may cause
exterior lighting capabilities of your Dodge Truck, please damage to the electrical system wiring and could
refer to the Body Builder’s Guide by accessing result in serious or fatal injury.
“www.dodge.com/bodybuilder” and choosing the ap-
propriate links.
The following chart identifies the maximum electrical 5
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness. loads that the trailer tow output circuits are capable of
supporting.
Trailer Tow Additional Lamp Loads Towing Tips

Output Maximum Additional Bulbs Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
Functions Current Allowed Example and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
Only. Other bulb traffic.
combinations can If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
be used as long as
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch
maximum current
is not exceeded. slippage.
2 #3157 bulbs for Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
Stop/Turn Left 16A
stop/turn The “D” range can be selected when towing. However, if
Stop/Turn 2 #3157 bulbs for frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “TOW
16A
Right stop/turn HAUL” or “OD/OFF” range should be selected.
2 #1157 bulbs (two NOTE: Using the “TOW HAUL” or “OD/OFF” range
filament park/
Trailer Park while operating the vehicle under heavy operating con-
14A stop/turn) plus up
Lamps ditions will improve performance and extend transmis-
to 24 #168 or #194
peanut bulbs. sion life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
This action will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be − When using the speed control, if you experience speed
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
45 minutes of continuous operation. See Maintenance you can get back to cruising speed.
Schedule in section 8 of this manual for transmission
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
fluid change intervals.
maximize fuel efficiency.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
Towing Tips — Cooling System
before towing.
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
Towing Tips — Tow/Haul (If Equipped) heating, take the following actions:
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat- 5
− City Driving
ing, turn the “TOW HAUL OD/OFF” feature ON when
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive
in neutral and increase engine idle speed.
position 2 on more severe grades.
− Highway Driving
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Reduce speed.
Equipped)
− Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
− refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
tion.
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or out-
board, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped Out or
In). A small blindspot mirror is integrated onto the main
mirror surface. Blindspot Mirror
NOTE: Fold the 7 x 10 inch trailer towing mirrors

rearward prior to entering an automated car wash.
follow the recommendations contained within the cur-

rent Dodge Body Builders Guide. See your dealer, in-
staller or snowplow manufacture for this information.
There are unique electrical systems that must be con-
nected to properly assure operator safety and prevent
overloading vehicle systems.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely 5

affect performance of the airboat system in an acci-
dent. Do not expect that the airbag will perform as
Trailer Towing Position described earlier in this manual
SNOWPLOW
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
installed option. These packages include components CAUTION!
necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exte-
NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
rior lamps are not properly installed.
recommended that the owner / installer obtain and
Before plowing 1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck

should not exceed two.
• Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid
level. 2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear
GAWR should never be exceeded.
• Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tight-
ness. 3. The snowplow prep packages are not available with
the Sport Package.
• Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
The cutting edge should be 1/4 to 1/2 inch above 4. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of
ground in snow plowing position. options or passengers, etc.
• Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func- The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow
tioning properly. system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers,
options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross
Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability
Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR)
For Information about snowplow applications visit
ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Com-
www.dodge.com or refer to the current Dodge Body
pliance Certification Label on the driver’s side door
Builders Guide.
opening.
NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting pas-
sengers.
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifica- conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The
tions at the factory without consideration for the weight operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance
of the plow. Front end tow-in should be checked and and allow adequate passing clearance.
reset if necessary at the beginning and end of the
Methods For Removing Snow
snowplow season. This will help prevent uneven tire
wear.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is
parked.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip- 5
ment following the recommendations provided by the
specific snowplow manufacturer.
Over the Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.
Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade
completely and position it as low as road or surface
Operating Tips General Maintenance

Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h) Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
should be maximum operating speed. The operator plow manufacturer’s instructions.
should be familiar with the area and surface to be
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery
cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution when
terminals clean and free of corrosion.
plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and driv-
NOTE: During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped
etrain damage, the following precautions should be ob-
with an overhead console module, the outside tempera-
served.
ture display will show higher temperatures than the
outside ambient temperature. The higher displayed tem- • Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small
perature is due to blocked or reduced airflow to the or congested areas where speeds are not likely to
underhood ambient temperature sensor by the snow- exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in
plow. This is common and outside temperature display 4H.
operation will return to normal when the snowplow is
• Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4L
removed.
range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended
periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.
• Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has

CAUTION!
returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
practice of stepping on the brake pedal before shifting Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a
the transmission. front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND towing.
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational Towing – 2 Wheel Drive Models NOTE: Both the Manual Shift and Electronic Shift
transfer cases must be shifted into Neutral (N) for
Recreational towing of 2 Wheel Drive models is not recreational towing. Automatic transmissions must be 5
allowed. Towing with the rear wheels on the ground can placed in P (Park) position for recreational towing.
result in severe transmission damage. Manual transmissions must be left in gear (not in neutral)
Recreational Towing – 4 Wheel Drive Models for recreational towing. Refer below for the proper trans-
fer case Neutral shifting procedure for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these requirements can cause severe

damage to the transmission and/or transfer case.
Recreational Towing Procedure — Manual Shift 5. Shift transfer case lever into N (NEUTRAL).
Transfer Case — If Equipped
6. Start the engine.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing: 7. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R).
8. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that
CAUTION!
there is no vehicle movement.
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that 9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with the transmission in Drive
the transfer case is fully in N (NEUTRAL) before (D).
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts. 10. Shut OFF the engine and place the ignition key to the
unlocked OFF position.
11. Shift automatic transmission into P (PARK).
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
12. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shut OFF the engine.
13. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
4. Shift automatic transmission to N (NEUTRAL), or
depress the clutch on manual transmissions.
4. Depress the brake pedal.

CAUTION!
5. Shift automatic transmission to N (NEUTRAL), or
Damage to the automatic transmission may occur if depress the clutch on manual transmissions.
the transmission is shifted into P (PARK) with the
transfer case in N (NEUTRAL) and the engine RUN- 6. Shift transfer case lever to desired position.
NING. With the transfer case in N (NEUTRAL) 7. Shift automatic transmission into P (Park).
ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the
transmission into P (PARK) WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the

5
Returning to Normal Operation — Manual Shift vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
Transfer Case (NEUTRAL) position without first fully engaging the
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for parking brake. The transfer case N (NEUTRAL) po-
normal usage: sition disengages both the front and rear driveshafts
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to
move regardless of the transmission position. The
2. Apply the parking brake. parking brake should always be applied when the
3. Shut OFF the engine. driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION! CAUTION!
• Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be the transfer case is fully in Neutral (N) before recre-
damaged. ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage 1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
the internal parts.
Recreational Towing Procedure — Electronic Shift 3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, but do not
Transfer Case — If Equipped start the engine.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for 4. Depress the brake pedal.
recreational towing.
5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress
clutch on manual transmission.
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object, 13. Shift automatic transmission into Park (P).
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
14. Apply parking brake.
4 seconds.
15. Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar.
7. After shift is completed and the Neutral (N) light
comes on release Neutral (N) button. 16. Release parking brake.
8. Start engine. NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button,
9. Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R).
and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elapses
10. Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that and the shift has been completed. If any of these require- 5
there is no vehicle movement. ments (with the exception of 3 - Key ON) are not met
prior to depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive
longer met during the 4 second timer, then the Neutral
(D).
(N) indicator light will flash continuously until all re-
12. Shut engine OFF and place ignition key to the quirements are met or until the Neutral (N) button is
unlocked OFF position. released.
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take Returning to Normal Operation — Electronic Shift
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. Transfer Case
If the key in not ON, the shift will not take place and no Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
position indicator lights will be on or flashing. normal usage.
NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light 1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
CAUTION! 3. Turn the ignition key to the ON position, but do not
start the engine.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into Park (P) with the transfer case 4. Depress the brake pedal.
in Neutral (N) and the engine RUNNING. With the 5. Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress
transfer case in Neutral (N) ensure that the engine is clutch on manual transmission.
OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park (P).
6. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for
1 second.
7. After the Neutral (N) indicator light turns off release
the Neutral (N) button.
8. After the Neutral (N) button has been released the depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met
transfer case will shift to the position identified by the during the 1 second time, then all of the mode position
selector switch. indicator lights will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the Neutral (N) button is released.
9. Shift automatic transmission into P (Park).
NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take
NOTE: The transfer case can not be shifted into Neutral
place and for the position indicator lights to be operable.
(N) from the 4Auto (if equipped) position.
If the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no
NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button, 5
NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light
and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements
(with the exception of 3 - key ON) are not met prior to
WARNING! CAUTION!
You or others could be injured if you leave the • Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the damaged.
parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position • Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from fluid will leak from the transfer case and fluid loss
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move will damage internal parts.
despite the transmission position. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
m Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 m Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
m Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 ▫ With Portable Starting Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ 3500 Models – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 m Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
m Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 m Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 394 6
▫ Tire Changing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 m Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
m Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 ▫ 4-Wheel- Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ 2–Wheel- Drive Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
378 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER To engage the Hazard Warning lights, depress the button
The Hazard Warning switch is mounted on the top of the on the top of the steering column. When the Hazard
steering column as shown in the illustration. Warning switch is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash off and on to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning lights will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is OFF.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning lights
Hazard Light Warning Switch
may discharge your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 379
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 3500 Models – If Equipped

The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
WARNING! passenger seat. Lift the flap on the side of the seat for
access.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body sliding the assembly from under the seat.
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
6
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Tire Changing Procedure
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them
in the original carrier and location. While driving WARNING!
you may experience, abrupt stopping, rapid accelera-
tion, or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
other objects in the vehicle may move around with vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
force, resulting in serious injury. could be crushed. Never get any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need
4500/5500 Models to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
These vehicles do not come with a jack. where it can be raised on a lift.
NOTE: Jacking and tire changing on 4500/5500 models
should be performed by an authorized dealer, or knowl-
Do not raise this vehicle using a bumper jack. The jack is
edgeable service personnel with the appropriate heavy
designed as a tool for changing tires on this vehicle only.
duty equipment like a tire service company.
It is not recommended that the jack be used for service
purposes or to lift more than one wheel at a time.
NOTE: Jacking and tire changing on 4500/5500 models • Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
should be performed by an authorized dealer, or knowl-
• Block both the front and rear
edgeable service personnel with the appropriate heavy
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
duty equipment like a tire service company.
site the jacking position. For
Preparations example, if the right front
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or wheel is being changed, block
slippery areas. Set the parking brake and place the gear the left rear wheel.
selector in PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE
• Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
(manual transmission). On four-wheel drive vehicles,
vehicle is being jacked.
shift the transfer case to the “4L” position.
6
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
Instructions 1. If equipped, remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools

from storage.
WARNING!
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising 3. When changing the front wheel, assemble the jack
the vehicle. drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to extension tube. Place the jack under the axle as close to
be raised. the tire as possible with the drive tubes extending to the
• Apply the parking brake firmly before jacking. front. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
• Never start the engine with the vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
6
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
extension tube. Securely place the jack under the sway adjust the jack position as required.
bar bracket (unless both tire’s are flat on one side, then
NOTE: If the jack will not lower by turning the dial
place jack under shock bracket) facing forward in vehicle.
(thumb wheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the
Connect the jack tube extension and lug wrench.
jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the 6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface. using a crisscross pattern. Correct nut tightness is 135 ft.
lbs. (183 N·m) torque for single rear wheel (SRW) models
WARNING! and 145 ft. lbs. (197 N·m) for dual rear wheel models. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make with a torque wrench by your dealer or at a service
the vehicle unstable and cause an accident. It could station.
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire. WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or

5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Al-
the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel
of the nuts toward the wheel on single rear wheel (SRW) in the places provided.
models. On dual rear wheel models (DRW) the lug nuts
are a two piece assembly with a flat face. Lightly tighten
the nuts. To avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, 7. Install wheel center cap (if equipped) and remove
do not fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel
lowered. center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap
damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the jack On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must
will not lower by turning the dial (thumb wheel) by first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a
hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the
order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and rear hub caps. Position the hook and pull out on the
tools as previously described. ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel
skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap on
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do the caps off. The wheel skin can now be removed.
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
CAUTION!
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle Use a back and forth motion to remove the hub cap. 6
off the ground. Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub
For single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the blade on the cap, damage to the hub cap finish may occur.
end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off. Insert the
blade end into the pryoff notch and carefully pop off the
hub cap with a back and forth motion.
Dual Rear Wheels

CAUTION!
Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The lug
The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pry nuts are a two piece assembly. When the tires are being
off notches. Make sure that the hook of the jack rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add 2 drops
handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch of oil at the interface between the hex and the washer.
before attempting to pull off.
You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the
wheel skins. Insert the flat tip completely and using a
back and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this
procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When
replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the
lugnut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a
rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins
are firmly seated around the wheel.
Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows:
inner and outer wheels. Align these slots when assem-
bling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the
inner wheel. The tires of both dual wheels must be
completely off the ground when tightening to insure
wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping.
Dual wheel models require a special heavy-duty lug nut
tightening adapter (included with the vehicle) to cor-
rectly tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is necessary to
remove and install dual rear wheels, use a proper vehicle
lifting device. 6
NOTE: When installing a spare tire (if equipped) as part
of a dual rear wheel end combination, the tire diameter of
the two individual tires must be compared. If there is a
significant difference, the larger tire should be installed in
a front location. Correct direction of rotation for dual tire
installations must also be observed.
It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued

to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
Wheel Nut Torque
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi-
nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the
bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles
of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly
set. All nuts should first be firmly seated against the
wheel. The nuts should then be tightened to recom-
mended torque. Tighten the nuts to final torque in
1. Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a
increments. Progress around the bolt circle, tightening
snug fit.
the nut opposite to the nut just previously tightened until
2. Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the final torque is achieved. Recommended torques are
torques listed in the table. Go through the sequence a shown in the following chart.
second time to verify that specific torque has been
achieved. Retighten to specifications at 100 miles (160
km) and after 500 miles (800 km).
Disc Type Nut Stud Size Torque Torque HOISTING

Wheels Ft. Lbs. Newton A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking
Meters locations, refer to the graphics that show jacking loca-
Cone 9/16-18 120-150 160-200 tions. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be
used on any other parts or the underbody.
Flanged 9/16-18 130-160 190-220
To Stow The Flat Or Spare (If Equipped) CAUTION!
Refer to Upfitters Body Builders Guide for information
on stowing your spare tire (If Equipped). Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
may result.
6
JUMP-STARTING NOTE: Replacement batteries should both be of equal

size to prevent damage to the vehicles charging system.
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with two 12–volt batteries. If it
To prevent personal injury or damage to clothing, do becomes necessary to use a booster battery, with jumper
not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or fabrics. cables, to start a vehicle’s engine because its batteries are
Do not lean over a battery when connecting jumper discharged, the following procedure should be followed:
cables or allow cable clamps to touch each other. Set the parking brake and place an automatic transmis-
Keep open flames or sparks away from battery vent sion in PARK (or NEUTRAL for a manual transmission).
holes. Always wear eye protection when working Turn off lights, heater and other electrical loads. Observe
with batteries. charge indicator (if equipped) in both batteries. If indica-
Do not use a booster battery or any other booster tor (if equipped) is light or yellow on either battery,
source that has a greater than 12 volt system, i.e. do replace that battery.
not use a 24 volt power source.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Use the Jump Start Procedure only when the charge Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
indicator (if equipped) in both batteries is dark in the could establish a ground connection and personal
center. Do not attempt jump starting when either injury could result.
battery charge indicator (if equipped) is bright or
yellow. If charge indicator (if equipped) has a green
dot in the center, failure to start is not due to a
discharged battery and cranking system should be
checked.
6
1. Attach one jumper cable to the positive terminal of
booster battery and the other end of the same cable to the
positive terminal of the discharged battery.
2. Connect one end of the other jumper cable to negative 3. Take care that the clamps from one cable do not
(-) post of booster battery. Connect the other end of the inadvertently touch clamps from the other cable. Do not
jumper cable to a good ground on the engine block of the lean over the battery when making connection. The
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure a good negative connection must provide good electrical con-
connection is made, free of dirt and grease. ductivity and current carrying capacity.
4. After the engine is started or if the engine fails to start,
WARNING!
cables must be disconnected in the following order:
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the a. Disconnect the negative cable at the engine ground.
discharge battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode. b. Disconnect the negative cable at the negative post
on booster battery.
• During cold weather when temperatures are be-
low freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged c. Disconnect the cable from the positive post of both
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump starting batteries.
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought up above
freezing point before attempting jump start.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Any procedure other than above could result in: It is very important that the starting unit operating
1. Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out voltage does not exceed 12 Volts D.C. or damage to
the battery vent; battery, starter motor, alternator, or electrical system
may occur.
2. Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion;
3. Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
of immobilized vehicle. If vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the gear 6
selector rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE
With Portable Starting Unit (automatic transmissions) and between 1st and RE-
There are many types of these units available. Follow the VERSE (manual transmissions), while applying slight
manufacturer’s instructions for necessary precautions pressure to the accelerator.
and operation.
In general, the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
wheels or racing the engine is most effective. Racing the hooks.
engine or spinning the wheels, due to the frustration of
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
not freeing the vehicle, may lead to transmission over-
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
heating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
damage to the vehicle.
transmission selector in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will
WARNING!
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

WARNING!
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks. damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
Tow straps and chains may break, causing serious equipment designed for the purpose, following equip-
injury. ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
the main structural members of the vehicle—not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws
CAUTION! applying to vehicles under tow must be observed.
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for 6
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
4-Wheel- Drive Vehicles The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow vehicle
CAUTION! on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the
opposite end on a towing dolly.
To avoid damage to the transfer case while towing,
always use one of the following methods. 2–Wheel- Drive Vehicles
Provided that transmission is operable, tow on a flatbed
or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a
NOTE: The Transfer Case must be in the neutral posi- dolly.
tion, and the transmission must be in Park (Automatic
Transmission), or in gear (Manual Transmission) to tow a
4WD vehicle with one end of the vehicle raised.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
m Engine Compartment — 6.7L Diesel Engine . . . . 400 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
m Engine Compartment— 5.7L Gas Engine . . . . . . 401 ▫ Drive Belts (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
m Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) . . . . . . . . . 402 ▫ Drive Belt (Diesel Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter (Gas Engines) . . . . . 413
m Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter (Diesel Engines) . . . . 414 7
m Engine Data Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 ▫ Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter (Diesel
Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
m Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Engine Fuel Filter (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . 420
m Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
▫ Spark Plugs (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
m Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
398 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Catalytic Converter (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . 420 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430

▫ Intervention Regeneration Strategy – EVIC ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Message Process Flow (Catalyst Full Message)
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
(Diesel Engines Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
▫ Emission-Related Components (Gas Engines) . . 425
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Maintenance Free Battery (Gas Engines) . . . . . 425
▫ Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ Maintenance Free Batteries (Diesel Engines) . . . 426
▫ Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
(Diesel Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 440
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Fuel System Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
▫ Steering Linkage — Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
▫ Front Prop Shaft Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
▫ Front Axle Universal Drive Joints And
▫ Clutch Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 399
▫ Rear Axle And 4X4 Front Driving Axle m Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
m Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
▫ Transfer Case — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
m Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . 445
▫ Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park And Turn
▫ Automatic Transmission (Gas Engine Only) . . . 446 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
▫ Automatic Transmission (Diesel Engine ▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
▫ Cab Top Clearance Lights — If Equipped . . . . 473
▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 451
m Fluid And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
▫ Noise Control System Required Maintenance
m Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 476
& Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 7
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
m Fuses (Integrated Power Module) . . . . . . . . . . . 462
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.7L DIESEL ENGINE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT— 5.7L GAS ENGINE
7
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)

CAUTION!
Vehicles equipped with California emissions controls
have a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indicator
OBDII. This system monitors the performance of the Light” on could cause further damage to the emission
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control control system. It could also affect fuel economy and
systems. When these systems are operating properly, driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any
your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel emissions tests can be performed.
economy, as well as engine emissions well within current
government regulations. If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
though your vehicle will usually be driveable and not
If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
filler cap in loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
possible.
GASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a “clicking” sound is
heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly
tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the ENGINE DATA PLATE
message off. If the problem persists, the message will Use the information from the engine data plate when
appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might discussing service or sourcing parts for your engine. The
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice engine data plate is located on the intake side of the
in a row, the system will turn on the Malfunction breather cover.
Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the problem will turn
the MIL light off. DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
REPLACEMENT PARTS tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
Use of genuine Mopart parts for normal/scheduled an expert manner. Service manuals are available which
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in- include detailed service information for your vehicle.
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
caused by the use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance yourself.
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s 7
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
warranty.
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
for your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempt-

WARNING!
ing any procedure yourself. See Service Publications
You can be badly injured working on or around a information at the back of this manual.
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. CAUTION!
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
To maintain your vehicle safely follow these
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
guidelines:
mechanic.
• Watch your vehicle’s mileage and check your Mainte-

SERVICE INFORMATION nance Schedules regularly for required servicing. Ex-
Mopar Fluids, Lubricants and Parts are available from cessive wear or damage to certain vehicle components
your dealer and will help you keep your vehicle operat- can result if required services are not performed.
ing at its best. Your dealer also has the qualified service
personnel, special tools and equipment to perform all • If you have your vehicle undercoated, inspect for
service operations in an expert manner. Service manuals undercoating material on the propeller shafts. Such
are available which include detailed service information material could cause the shafts to become unbalanced
and result in drivetrain vibrations. Remove any under-
coating with solvent.
• If you have your vehicle undercoated, make sure no • Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent.
undercoating material is sprayed on the exhaust sys- They can be unstable under certain conditions and be
tem or components of the seat belt system. hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
NOTE: It is not possible for the manufacturer and • If an engine has been operating and the coolant is hot,
Cummins, Inc. to anticipate every possible circumstance allow the engine to cool before you slowly loosen the
that can involve a potential hazard. filler cap and relieve the pressure from the cooling
system.
WARNING!
• To avoid burns, remember that the engine components
To maintain your vehicle safely and avoid personal will stay hot after the engine is shut off.
injury, follow these guidelines: • Do not use gasoline or other flammable materials to
clean parts. Always use approved cleaning solvents.
• Never spray or pour diesel fuel, flammable liquid or • Relieve all pressure in the fuel, oil and cooling systems 7
starting fluids (ether) into the air cleaner assembly, air before any lines, fittings or related items are removed
intake piping or turbocharger inlet in an attempt to or disconnected. Be alert for possible pressure when
start the vehicle, unintended engine acceleration may disconnecting any device from a system that utilizes
occur.
pressure. Do not check for pressure leaks with your MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
hand. High pressure oil or fuel can cause personal The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
injury. services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
injury or death. could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
• Important: All maintenance other than that listed in Engine Oil
this manual, as well as some procedures listed here,
MUST be performed by your local Dodge Truck Checking Oil Level
Dealer. Your authorized Dodge Dealer has been To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
trained and has the necessary parts to maintain your engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
engine. the oil level at regular intervals. The best time to check
the oil level is before starting the engine after it has been
parked overnight. When checking oil after operating the
engine, first ensure the engine is at full operating tem-

perature, then wait for 30 minutes (6.7L Diesel Engine),
and 15 minutes (5.7L Gas Engine) after engine shutdown
to check the oil.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION! Never operate the engine with oil level below the “ADD”
mark or above the upper “SAFE” mark. 7
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage Change Engine Oil (Gas Engines)
your engine. Follow the Gas Engine Maintenance Schedule for recom-
mended engine oil change intervals.
Engine Oil Selection (Gas Engines) Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
For best performance and maximum protection under all For trucks with a 5.7L engine operating under a gross
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only combined weight rating of 14,000 lbs or greater, SAE
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard temperatures. For all other trucks with a 5.7L engine,
MS-6395. Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting the operating under a gross weight rating less than 14,000
specification MS-6395. lbs SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all
operating temperatures. These engine oils improve low
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your
Identification Symbol
engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
This symbol means that the oil has
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle.
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The For information on engine oil filler cap location, see the
manufacture only recommends Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
API Certified engine oils.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Change Engine Oil (Diesel Engines) American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Follow the Diesel Maintenance Schedule for recom- Identification Symbol
mended engine oil change intervals. This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petro-
Engine Oil Selection (Diesel Engines)
leum Institute (API). The manufacture
For best performance and maximum protection under all
only recommends API Certified en-
types of operating conditions, the manufacture only
gine oils.
recommends engine oils that are API CJ-4 certified and
meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler. Use Mopar or
an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-10902.
Oils with a high ash content may produce deposits on
Products meeting Cummins CES 20081 may also be used.
valves that can progress to guttering and valve burning.
The identification of these engine oils are typically lo-
A maximum sulfated ash content of 1.00 mass % is
cated on the back of the oil container.
recommended for all oil used in the engine.
7
The same oil change interval is to be followed for
synthetic oil as for petroleum based oil. Also, synthetic oil
must meet the same performance specifications as petro-
leum oil.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) Materials Added to Engine Oil

Use SAE 15W-40 Engine Oil that meets The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
DaimlerChrysler Materials Standard MS-10902 and the tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes or
API CJ-4 engine oil category. lube odorants) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engi-
neered product and it’s performance may be impaired by
Engine oil not designated by the DaimlerChrysler or
supplemental additives.
Cummins Material Standards and API CJ-4 should not be
used, engine and exhaust system durability may be NOTE: The manufacturer offers a lube odorant (Mopar
compromised. For lower temperature operation SAE Diesel Fresh) for diesel engines crankcases. The lube
5W-40 engine oils may be used. These oils must meet the odorant is recommended by the manufacturer to reduce
same requirements as stated previously. Your engine oil the sulfur smell that may occur during engine idling.
filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscos-
Engine Oil Filter
ity for your vehicle.
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the
Synthetic Engine Oils correct part number. The engine oil filter should be
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom- changed at every engine oil change.
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
Engine Oil And Filter — Change
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
Operate the engine until the coolant temperature reaches
are followed.
140°F (60°C). Shut the engine off. Remove the oil drain
plug.
Use a container that can hold at least 12 quarts (11.3

CAUTION!
Liters) to hold the used oil.
Always check the condition of the used oil. This can give The filtering medium of other aftermarket filters
you an indication of some engine problems that might may disintegrate. Debris from failed filters may plug
exist. the piston oil cooling nozzles, resulting in scuffed
pistons and engine failure.
• Thin, black oil indicates fuel dilution.
• Milky discoloration indicates coolant dilution.
Clean the area around the oil filter base. Remove the filter CAUTION!
from the underside of the vehicle using a cap style oil
Fill the oil filter element with clean oil before instal-
filter wrench.
lation. Use the same type oil that will be used in the
Clean the gasket surface of the filter mount. The filter engine. When filling the oil filter, prevent foreign 7
gasket can stick on the filter mount. Make sure it is material from falling into the filter. Severe engine
removed. damage may occur.
Change the engine oil filter with every engine oil change.
Only a high quality MOPAR filter should be used to Apply a light film of lubricating oil to the sealing surface
assure most efficient service. of the filter gasket before installing the filter.
Start the engine and operate it at idle for several minutes.

CAUTION!
Check for leaks at the lubricating oil filter and oil pan
Overtightening may distort the threads or damage drain plug.
the filter element seal. Run the engine until it has reached operating tempera-
ture, stop the engine. Wait approximately 15 minutes to
let the oil in the upper parts of the engine drain back to
Install the filter as specified by the filter manufacturer. the pan. Check the oil level again.
Turn the filter 3/4 to one full turn after making contact
with the gasket. Add oil as necessary to bring the level to the “SAFE”
mark on the dipstick.
Check the condition of the threads and sealing surface on
the oil pan and drain plug. Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of the used engine
Install the drain plug and sealing washer and tighten to fluids from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately
37 ft-lbs. (50 N·m). discarded, can present a problem to the environment.
Use only high-quality multi-grade lubricating oil in your Contact your local dealer, service station, or governmen-
engine. Choose the correct oil for your operating condi- tal agency for advice on recycling programs and where
tions as outlined in the Selection of Engine Oil. used fluids and filters can be safely discarded in your
area.
Fill the engine with the correct grade of new oil.
Drive Belts (Gas Engines) Drive Belt (Diesel Engines)

Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
Inspection
tensioner. No belt tension adjustments are required.
Check the belt for intersecting cracks.
However, belt and belt tensioner condition should be
inspected at the specified intervals and replaced if re- • Transverse (across the belt width) cracks are accept-
quired. See your authorized dealer for service. able.
At the mileage indicated in the maintenance schedule, all • Longitudinal (direction of belt length) cracks that
belts and tensioner should be checked for condition. intersect with transverse cracks are NOT acceptable.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
Replace the belt if it has unacceptable cracks, is frayed or
Belts should be inspected for evidence of cuts, cracks, has pieces of material missing.
glazing or frayed cords and replaced if there is indication
The engine speed sensor, located near the damper, should
of damage which could result in belt failure. Low gen-
erator belt tension can cause battery failure.
be inspected for damage if a belt is frayed. 7
Engine Air Cleaner Filter (Gas Engines)
Also check belt routing to make sure there is no interfer-
Follow the appropriate Maintenance Schedule for recom-
ence between the belts and other engine components.
mended Air Cleaner Replacement intervals.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter (Diesel Engines)

WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can CAUTION!
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
All air entering the engine intake must be filtered.
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
The abrasive particles in unfiltered air will cause
cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessary
rapid wear to engine components.
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, The air filter housing on your Diesel Ram is equipped
hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in with a Filter Minder™. This is an air flow restriction
serious personal injury. gauge that will indicate when the filter element needs to
be replaced.
Do not remove the top of the air filter housing to
inspect the filter element on your diesel engine under
normal operating conditions.
NOTE: The air filter housing contains a Mass Air Flow
sensor. This sensor is critical to proper engine operation
and component longevity. Any damage or modification
to this sensor could result in major engine and/or spring sealed inside the plastic housing. As the air
exhaust aftertreatment damage. This includes the use of cleaner filter becomes clogged and air pressure drop
non-approved air filters. Use only MOPARt approved air across the filter element increases, a yellow disc travels
filters or equivalent. along a graduated scale on the side of the Filter
Minder™.
The yellow disc will always show the greatest restriction
experienced by the filter element. When the disc reaches
the red zone, the filter element may need to be replaced.
There is no other time or mileage interval for changing
the air cleaner filter element.
If the vehicle experiences a sudden loss of engine power
when being driven in heavy snow or rain or when
plowing snow, check the Filter Minder™ 7
• If the Filter Minder™ is showing a plugged filter, the
filter should be visually inspected for snow/ice build
The clear plastic housing on the Filter Minder™ allows
up or extreme water saturation.
you to view the amount of air pressure drop across the
filter element. It consists of a diaphragm and a calibrated
• If the filter is not damaged, remove all snow/ice,

CAUTION!
reinstall filter and reset the Filter Minder™.
A visual inspection of the air cleaner filter element is When using an engine cleaner or a degreaser, be sure
never recommended under normal circumstances. A to wrap and tape the Filter Minder™ to protect the
badly restricted element may appear clean while a soiled plastic housing from damage and discoloration.
element may be quite effective in filtering particles
without restricting air flow. Rely on the Filter Minder™
to determine when a filter change is necessary. CAUTION!
After a new filter element is inserted, press the rubber
Many aftermarket performance air filter elements do
button on the top of the Filter Minder™. This action will
not adequately filter the air entering the engine. Use
reset the yellow disc to the clean position.
of such filters can severely damage your engine.
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter (Diesel

CAUTION!
Engines)
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new
fuel filter. There is a possibility debris could be
introduced into the fuel filter during this action. It is
best to install the filter dry and allow the in-tank lift
pump to prime the fuel system.
NOTE: The fuel filter and water separator assembly is

located on the driver’s side of the engine. The best access
to the water drain valve is through the driver’s side
wheel well.
7
NOTE: Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids
CAUTION! from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately dis-
carded, can present a problem to the environment. Con-
Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter when the tact your local dealer, service station, or government
engine is running.
agency for advice on recycling programs and for where

WARNING!
used fluids and filters can be properly disposed of in
your area. Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the
Drain a small amount from the fuel/water separator engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel
filter monthly or when the WATER IN FUEL indicator pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious
lamp is on. Turn the drain valve, located on the bottom of injury or death.
the filter, counterclockwise and allow any accumulated
water to drain. Leave the drain valve open until all water
and contaminants have been removed. Close the drain Priming if the engine has run out of fuel
valve, by turning it clockwise, when clean fuel is visible. 1. Add a substantial quantity of fuel to the tank 5 to 10
NOTE: The Fuel / Water separator drain valve is gallons (19L to 38L).
located on the bottom of the fuel filter housing. 2. Crank the engine for 1 to 2 seconds. If the engine does
If more than a couple ounces of fuel has been drained, not start, then release the key or starter button back to the
follow the directions below for “Priming if the engine has RUN position (do not turn the key back to the OFF
run out of fuel.” position). The electric fuel transfer pump will continue to
run and purge air from the system for about 25 seconds.
After 25 seconds, attempt to start the engine again.
3. Start the engine using the Normal Starting Procedure.
4. Repeat the procedure if the engine does not start.

WARNING!
CAUTION! Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending
agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions
Do not engage the starter motor for more than 15
and be hazardous or explosive when mixed with
seconds at a time. Allow two minutes between the
diesel fuel.
cranking intervals.
NOTE: The engine may run rough until the air is forced CAUTION!
from all the fuel lines.
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline, the
CAUTION! use of these fuels can cause damage to the fuel
system. 7
Diesel fuel will damage black top paving surfaces.
Drain the filter into an appropriate container.
NOTE: A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel, meeting
ASTM specification D-6751 may be used with your
Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle. Use of bio-diesel
mixture in excess of 5% can negatively impact the on- Spark Plugs (Gas Engines)
engine fuel filter’s ability to separate water from the fuel, Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
resulting in high pressure fuel system corrosion or dam- mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
age. stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
NOTE: As sufficient testing has not been completed,
plug, malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the cata-
ethanol blends are not recommended or approved for use
lytic converter. For proper type of replacement spark
with your Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle.
plugs, refer to the Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
NOTE: In addition, commercially available fuel addi- section in this manual.
tives are not necessary for the proper operation of your
Catalytic Converter (Gas Engines)
Cummins Diesel equipped vehicle.
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
Engine Fuel Filter (Gas Engines) only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at catalyst as an emission control device.
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
fuel tank, frequent filter replacement may be necessary.
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION! WARNING!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In materials that can burn. Such materials might be
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv- grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor- system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin- where your exhaust system can contact anything that
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe can burn.
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, the
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle should be stopped, the engine shut off and the
7
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed vehicle allowed to cool. Thereafter, service, including a
against you. tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be ob-
tained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage: To achieve these emission standards your vehicle is
equipped with state of the art engine and exhaust system.
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
The engine and exhaust aftertreatment system work
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
together to achieve the EPA Heavy Duty Diesel Engine
motion.
Emissions Standards. These systems are seamlessly inte-
• Do not try to start engine by pushing or towing the grated into your vehicle and managed by the Cummins
vehicle. 6.7L engine Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM
manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust sys-
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
tem’s catalyst to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM)
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions. Additionally, the overhead console in your vehicle has
the ability to alert you to additional maintenance re-
Intervention Regeneration Strategy – EVIC
quired on your truck or engine. Refer to the following
Message Process Flow (Catalyst Full Message)
messages that may be displayed on your Electronic
(Diesel Engines Only)
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC):
Your new Cummins 6.7L diesel meets all EPA Heavy
Duty Diesel Engine Emissions Standards, resulting in the
lowest emitting diesel engine ever produced.
Catalyst Full See Owner Manual

WARNING!
Catalyst Full See Owner Manual will be displayed on the
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over overhead console of your vehicle if the exhaust particu-
materials that can burn. Such materials might be late filter reaches 80% of its maximum storage capacity.
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust Under conditions of exclusive short duration and low
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas speed driving cycles, your Cummins engine and exhaust
where your exhaust system can contact anything that aftertreatment system may never reach the conditions
can burn. required to remove the trapped PM, if this occurs Cata-
lyst Full See Owner Manual will be displayed on the
overhead console in your vehicle. If this message is
Service CCV Filter displayed you will hear one chime to assist in alerting
The 6.7L Cummins engine utilizes a Closed Crankcase you of this condition.
Ventilation (CCV) system. This system filters and recycles
gasses produced in the crankcase during the normal
Catalyst Stat::::::::::80% 7
Catalyst Stat::::::::::80% will replace the message Catalyst
combustion process. Service CCV Filter will be displayed Full See Owner Manual after it is displayed for one
on the overhead console of your Dodge truck if the CCV minute. The engine Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
filter is due for required maintenance. This filter is will continue to monitor the amount of particulate matter
located on the top of the engine valve cover. For addi-
tional information, see your Dodge truck dealer.
trapped in the particulate filter. This message indicates CATALYST FULL SERVICE REQD
the percentage of the particulate filter capacity that has If the particulate filter reaches 99% of it’s capacity the
been used. overhead console in your vehicle will chime twice and
display the message CATALYST FULL SERVICE REQD.
By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds for as
At this point the engine PCM will register a fault code,
little as 45 minutes you can remedy the condition in the
the instrument panel will display a MIL light and the
particulate filter system and allow your Cummins engine
engine PCM will derate the truck reducing its horse-
and exhaust Aftertreatment system to remove the
power and torque output.
trapped PM and restore the system to normal operating
condition. The PCM derates the engine in order to limit the likeli-
hood of permanent damage to the aftertreatment system.
Catalyst Stat:::::::::::80%, 90%, 99%
If this condition is not corrected and a dealer service is
Catalyst Stat:::::::::::80%, 90%, 99% If you are unable to
not performed, extensive exhaust aftertreatment damage
drive your vehicle under these conditions for an ex-
can occur. In order to correct this condition it will be
tended period of time after the initial warning notifica-
necessary to have the truck serviced by your local
tion, the Engine PCM will continue to monitor the
authorized dealer.
particulate filter and will display the progression of
particulate filter usage (80, 90, 99%) on the EVIC message
center.
Emission-Related Components (Gas Engines)

WARNING!
Positive Crankcase (PCV) Valve
Proper operation of the crankcase ventilation system • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
requires that the PCV valve be free of sticking or plug- burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid
ging from deposits. Deposits can accumulate in the PCV to contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean
valve and passages with increasing mileage. Have the over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
PCV valve, hoses, and passages checked for proper splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
operation at the intervals specified. If the valve is diately with large amounts of water.
plugged or sticking, replace with a new valve— do not • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
attempt to clean the old PCV valve! Check the ventila- flame or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a
tion hoses for indications of damage, weepage or plug- booster battery or any other booster source with an
ging with deposits. Replace if necessary. output greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable
Maintenance Free Battery (Gas Engines) clamps to touch each other. 7
The top of the maintenance free battery is permanently • Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
maintenance required. after handling.
Maintenance Free Batteries (Diesel Engines)

CAUTION!
The top of the maintenance free batteries are perma-
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the nently sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is
battery that the positive cable is attached to the periodic maintenance required.
positive post and the negative cable is attached to NOTE: Replacement batteries should both be of equal
the negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) capacity to prevent damage to the vehicle’s charging
positive and negative (-) and identified on the system.
battery case.
• If a “fast charger” is used while battery is in
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Battery Blanket Usage

CAUTION!
A battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the battery
It is essential when replacing the cables on the temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°). For the same de-
battery that the positive cable is attached to the crease in temperature, the engine requires twice as much
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the power to crank at the same RPM. The use of 120 VAC
negative post. Battery posts are marked (+) positive powered battery blankets will greatly increase starting
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case. capability at low temperatures. Suitable battery blankets
Also, if a “fast charger” is used while battery is in are available from your authorized Mopart dealer.
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before Air Conditioner Maintenance
connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a “fast For best possible performance, your air conditioner
charger” to provide starting voltage. should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance 7
WARNING! test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
NOTE: Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information
tain lead and lead compounds. Always wash hands
book for further warranty information.
after handling the battery.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling

WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi- tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause using recovery and recycling equipment.
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Power Steering — Fluid Check
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
further warranty information. service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected DaimlerChrysler Dealership.9
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Front Suspension Ball Joints

WARNING!
The ball joints originally supplied with the vehicle are
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and permanently lubricated at the factory and do not require
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving service. The ball joints and seals should be inspected
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do whenever the vehicle is serviced for other reasons.
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended Steering Linkage — Inspection
power steering fluid. Whenever the vehicle is hoisted, all steering linkage
joints should be inspected for evidence of damage. If
seals are damaged, parts should be replaced to prevent
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated leakage or contamination of the grease.
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
7
Front Prop Shaft Lubrication Front Axle Universal Drive Joints And Ball Joints
Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil The front axle universal joint and ball joints are perma-
change listed in the appropriate Maintenance Schedule nently lubricated and do not require servicing.
for your vehicle. Use Mopart type MS-6560 (lithium
Body Lubrication
based grease), or equivalent.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Front Driveshaft Grease Fitting
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopart Lock Windshield Washers

Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
Windshield Wiper Blades
reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not ra-
The rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield
diator antifreeze).
should be cleaned periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accu- When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
mulations of salt or road film. washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
from a dry windshield. exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
containers. 7
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Exhaust System
WARNING!
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
Commercially available windshield washer solvents the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care system.
must be exercised when filling or working around Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
the washer solution. system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
After the engine has warmed, operate the defroster for a plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Mopar All seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
Weather Windshield Washer Solution, used with water as to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
the freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not for lubrication or oil change. Replace parts as required.
harmful to paint or trim.
Cooling System
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon WARNING!

monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, fol-
coming from under the hood, don’t open the hood
low the preceding safety tips.
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator
Exhaust System Rubber Isolator and Loop-Type is hot.
Hanger — If Equipped
Inspect surfaces whenever the vehicle is hoisted for
Engine Coolant Checks
rubber to metal separation or deep cracks. If, however,
excessively deep localized cracks are present, or any part
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 7
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
of the exhaust system abnormally contacts the under-
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
body hardware, the isolator and/or hanger should be
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
replaced.
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently Coolant bottle level check
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the The coolant reserve system provides a quick visual
face of the condenser. method of determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine idling, and warmed to the normal
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
operating temperature, the level of the coolant on the
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
coolant bottle should be between the fluid level marks.
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
Check the coolant level whenever the hood is raised.
leaks.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
Extremely cold ambient temperature may require the
no longer a need to remove the coolant pressure cap
addition of a “winter front” for effective operation of the
except for checking coolant freeze point or replacement
cab heating/cooling system. Make certain that a percent-
with new antifreeze coolant.
age of the radiator is exposed for adequate air flow
through the charge air cooler and automatic transmission
WARNING!
oil cooler. The percentage of opening must be increased
with the increasing ambient air temperature and/or Never add coolant to the radiator when the engine is
engine load. If the cooling fan can be heard cycling overheated. Do not loosen or remove pressure cap to
frequently, increase the size of the opening in the winter cool overheated engine! The coolant is under pres-
front. sure and severe scalding could result.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill

CAUTION!
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled. Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en-
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount gine coolants, may result in engine damage and may
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove is introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old gency, it should be replaced with the specified cool-
antifreeze solution. ant as soon as possible.
Selection Of Coolant Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
coolant type. be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator. 7
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Adding Coolant The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
nance period, it is important that you use the same
the vehicle is operated.
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi- NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
tive Technology (HOAT) coolant. engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% rec-
ommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Cooling System Pressure Cap
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technol- The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
ogy), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
234°F (237°C ) are anticipated.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
community. Do not store ethylene glycol-based engine

WARNING!
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on puddles on the ground. Prevent ingestion by animals and
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre- children. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to Coolant Level
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scald- determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
ing or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while engine cold, the level of the coolant in the coolant
the system is hot or under pressure. recovery bottle should be between the ranges indicated
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one on the bottle.
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en- The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
gine damage may result. no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for 7
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
be checked once a month.
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the • Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
not overfill. added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
Points To Remember
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
sure tested for leaks.
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- • Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
enter the radiator. corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler (Diesel
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install Engines)
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may The charge air cooler is positioned between the radiator
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas and the air conditioner condenser. Air enters the engine
mileage, and increased emissions. through the air cleaner and passes through the turbo-
charger where it is pressurized. This pressurized air
Fan
rapidly reaches high temperature. The air is then directed
Inspection through a hose to the charge air cooler and through
Check the fan for cracks and bent or broken blades. If any another hose to the intake manifold of the engine. The air
of these conditions exist, you must replace the fan. Make entering the engine has been cooled by about 50 to 100
sure it is securely mounted. degrees Fahrenheit. This cooling process enables more
efficient burning of fuel resulting in fewer emissions.
NOTE: This service procedure must be performed by a
trained service technician. Make arrangements with your To guarantee optimum performance of the system, keep 7
authorized Dodge Truck Dealer for this inspection. the surfaces of the charge air cooler, condenser and
radiator clean and free of debris. Periodically check the
hoses leading to and from the charge air cooler for cracks
or loose clamps resulting in loss of pressure and reduced
engine performance.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses Fuel System Connections

Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots, designed with tubes and special connects, connections
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces- and clamps which have unique material characteristics to
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber. provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deterio-
rated gasoline.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose You are urged to use only the manufactures-specified
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any tubes, connections and clamps, or their equivalent in
heat source or moving component which may cause heat material and specification, in any fuel system servicing.
damage or mechanical wear.
Brake System
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
Power Disc Brakes (Front and Rear)
collapsed.
Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou- hard stops during the break-in period are recommended
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material.
present.
Brake And Power Steering Hoses
Components should be replaced immediately if there is When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure. inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be performed
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling whenever the brake system is serviced and every engine
indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest cracking, scuffing, or worn spots. If there is any evidence
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold. of cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be
replaced immediately! Eventual deterioration of the hose
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
can take place resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou- WARNING!
plings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present. Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
NOTE: Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid, cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera- hoses replaced immediately. 7
tions to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings.
Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of
hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
vehicle operation), should be noted before hose is re-
placed based on leakage.
Brake Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check

WARNING!
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immedi- Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
ately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system boiling point, or unidentified as to specification, may
failure. result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic braking. You could have an accident.
reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“MAX” mark and an “MIN” mark (3500 vehicles only)
and a “FULL” and “ADD” mark (4500/5500 vehicles WARNING!
only). The fluid level must be kept within these two
marks. Do not add fluid above the full mark because Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
leakage may occur at the cap. spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
should be conducted. container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the moisture.
correct Fluid type.
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level

CAUTION!
For Models with 9.25 Front Axles and 11.5” Rear Axles
Do not allow a petroleum-base fluid to contaminate refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the
the brake fluid. Seal damage and loss of brake correct lubricant type. For normal service, periodic fluid
performance may result. level checks are not required. When the vehicle is ser-
viced for other reasons, the exterior surfaces of the axle
assembly should be inspected.
Clutch Hydraulic System When checking the fluid level (3500 only), the vehicle
The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance-free should be in a level position. The fluid level should be
system. In the event of leakage or other malfunction, the 1/4” ± 1/4” (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the
system must be replaced. front axle. The fluid level should be 1/4” ± 1/4” (6.4 mm
Clutch Linkage ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the rear axle.
If the clutch pedal linkage begins to squeak or grunt, the When checking the fluid level (4500/5500 only), the 7
clutch pedal pivot bushings should be lubricated. Refer vehicle should be in a level position. The fluid level
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct should be 1/4” ± 1/4” (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill
lubricant type. Multipurpose Grease, NLGI Grade 2 E.P. hole on the front axle. The fluid level should be level with
the bottom of the fill hole on the rear axle.
Drain And Refill Follow the appropriate Maintenance Schedule for recom-
On 3500 vehicles the differential cover must be removed mended front and rear axle fluid change intervals.
to drain the axle fluid.
Lubricant Selection
On 4500/5500 vehicles remove the lower bolt to drain the Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the
axle fluid. correct lubricant type.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials DO NOT REQUIRE any
limited slip oil additive (friction modifiers).
NOTE: Slight noise and mild shuddering may be evi-
dent while turning a vehicle with limited slip differential
on concrete or dry pavement. These conditions should be
considered normal operation of the limited slip differen-
1 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Fill Plug
2 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Drain Plug
tial.
Transfer Case — If Equipped Manual Transmission — If Equipped

Drain And Refill Lubricant Selection for 6-Speed Manual
Follow the appropriate Maintenance Schedule for recom- Transmission — If Equipped
mended transfer case fluid change intervals. If it becomes necessary to add fluid or change the fluid,
be sure to use the same lubricant or equivalent. Refer to
Lubricant Selection
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the correct
lubricant type.
correct lubricant type.
Follow the Maintenance Schedule for recommended
Fluid Level Check
transmission fluid change intervals.
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler
plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the Fluid Level Check
filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position. This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler
plug. If the level of the lubricant is more than 1/4” below 7
the bottom of the filler hole while the vehicle is on level
ground, enough lubricant should be added to bring the
level to the bottom of the filler hole.
Automatic Transmission (Gas Engine Only) Fluid Level Check – 545RFE Transmission
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
Selection Of Lubricant
operating temperature 180° F (82° C). This occurs after at
least 15 mi (25 km) of driving. At normal operating
correct lubricant type. It is important that the transmis-
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be-
sion fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the
tween the fingertips.
recommended fluid.
Procedure For Checking Fluid Level
CAUTION! To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level,
the following procedure must be used:
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in 1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter temperature.
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the 2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to 3. Fully apply parking brake.
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct 4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
fluid type. position ending with the lever in P (Park).
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until reference holes when the transmission reaches 180° F (21°
seated. C). Remember it is best to check the level at the normal
operating temperature.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the HOT
CAUTION!
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-
ing temperature. Verify that a solid coating of oil is seen Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50° F
on both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as (10° C), it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait produce an accurate reading.
a minimum of two (2) minutes for the oil to fully drain
into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below 7. Check for leaks. Release the Parking Brake.
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
7
between the two cold (lower) holes on the dipstick with transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
the fluid at approximately 70° F (21° C) (room tempera- certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is
ture). If the fluid level is correctly established at room normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from
temperature, it should be between the HOT (upper) its fully seated positions, as long as its seal remains
engaged in the dipstick tube.
Automatic Transmission Fluid and Filter Change

CAUTION!
Follow the Maintenance Schedule for recommended
transmission fluid and filter change intervals. Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
reason, the fluid and filter should be changed. transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
Special Additives manufacturers recommended fluid will result in se-
The manufacturer recommends against the addition of rious damage to the transmission. Refer to Fluids,
any additives to the transmission. Exception to this Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. The use of transmission sealers should be avoided,
since they may adversely affect seals. Fluid Level Check – AS68RC Transmission
Automatic Transmission (Diesel Engine Only) Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 167° F (76° C). This occurs after at
Selection Of Lubricant least 15 mi (25 km) of driving. At normal operating
Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for the temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be-
correct lubricant type. It is important that the transmis- tween the fingertips.
sion fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the
recommended fluid.
Procedure For Checking Fluid Level the cold region on the dipstick as a rough reference when
To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level, doing initial oil level set after transmission rebuild or
the following procedure must be used: transmission refill.
1. The vehicle must be on level ground. 6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it until seated.
2. Operate the engine at idle speed for a minimum of 60 7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
seconds and normal operating temperature. both sides. The fluid level should be between the HOT
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-
3. Fully apply parking brake and press the brake pedal.
ing temperature. Verify that a solid coating of oil is seen
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear on both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add
position ending with the lever in P (Park). Make sure the Mopart A68SRC™ Automatic Transmission Fluid as
engine is running at idle speed. required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. Never
use any ATF other than Mopart AS68RC™ Automatic
5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
Transmission Fluid. After adding any quantity of oil 7
or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 160° F - 175° F (70° C
through the dipstick tube, wait a minimum of two (2)
– 82° C), Which is the normal operating temperature after
minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission
the vehicle has been driven at least 15 miles. The fluid can
before rechecking the fluid level.
not be comfortably held between the finger tips. Only use
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two cold (lower) holes on the dipstick with NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
the fluid at approximately 70° F – 85° F (20° C – 30° C). If transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
the fluid level is correctly established at room tempera- certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is
ture, it should be between the HOT (upper) reference normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from
holes when the transmission reaches 160° F - 175° F (70° its fully seated positions, as long as its seal remains
C – 82° C). Remember it is best to check the level at the engaged in the dipstick tube.
normal operating temperature.
Automatic Transmission Fluid and Filter Change
To obtain best performance and long life for automatic
CAUTION!
transmissions, the manufacturer recommends that they
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50° F be given regular maintenance service by an Authorized
(10° C), it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add Dodge Dealer or Service Center. It is important that the
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to transmission fluid is maintained at the correct level, and
produce an accurate reading. Never use any ATF that it be drained and refilled as specified.
other than Mopart AS68RC™ Automatic Transmis- It is important that proper lubricant is used in the
sion Fluid. transmission. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for the correct lubricant type. A filter change should
be made at the time of the oil change.
8. Check for leaks. Release the Parking Brake.
The fluid and filter(s) should be changed as specified in “purge” excess grease and the bearing will look slightly
the Maintenance Schedule (Section 8). wet. This is normal. Periodic inspection for excess play is
recommended.
NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any
reason, the fluid and filter should be changed, and the Rear Wheel Bearings — Manufacturer’s Axles
bands adjusted (if equipped). These bearings are normally considered permanently
lubricated. Cleaning and repacking is required only
Special Additives
when axle shafts are removed or in case of extreme water
The manufacturer recommends against the addition of
or dust contamination.
any additives to the transmission. Exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid Noise Control System Required Maintenance &
leaks. The use of transmission sealers should be avoided, Warranty
since they may adversely affect seals. For 3500/4500/5500 Two-Wheel Drive and Four-Wheel
Drive models over 10,000 lbs. (4 535 kg) Gross Vehicle
Front and Rear Wheel Bearings
Weight Rating. 7
Front Wheel Bearings
Front wheel bearings for all Dodge Ram Trucks are
sealed-for-life. They do not require greasing or seal
replacement. In some instances, these bearings will
All vehicles built over 10,000 lbs. (4 535 kg) Gross Vehicle Required Maintenance For Noise Control Systems
Weight Rating and manufactured for sale and use in the The following maintenance services must be performed
United States are required to comply with the Federal every 6 months or 6,000 miles (9 600 km) whichever
Government’s Exterior Noise Regulations. These vehicles comes first, to assure proper operation of the noise
can be identified by the Noise Emission Control Label control systems. In addition, inspection and service
located in the operator’s compartment. should be performed anytime a malfunction is observed
or suspected. Proper maintenance of the entire vehicle
will help the effectiveness of the noise control systems.
Exhaust System
Inspect the entire exhaust system for leaks and damaged
parts. Devices such as hangers, clamps, and U-bolts
should be tight and in good condition. Damaged compo-
nents, burned or blown out mufflers, burned or rusted
out exhaust pipes should be replaced according to the
procedures and specifications outlined in the appropriate
service manual.
Air Cleaner Assembly Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
Inspect air cleaner housing for proper assembly and fit. the acts listed below.
Make certain that the air cleaner is properly positioned
• AIR CLEANER
and that the cover is tight. Check all hoses leading to the
air cleaner for tightness. The air filter element must also − Removal of the air cleaner.
be clean and serviced according to the instructions out-
− Removal of the air cleaner filter element from the air
lined in the Maintenance Schedule Section of this
cleaner housing.
manual.
− Removal of the air ducting.
Tampering With Noise Control System Prohibited
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing • EXHAUST SYSTEM
thereof: (1) the removal or rendering inoperative by any
− Removal or rendering inoperative exhaust system
person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair, or
components including the muffler or tailpipe.
replacement, of any device or element of design incorpo- 7
rated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise • ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate
− Removal or rendering inoperative the fan clutch.
purchaser or while it is in use, or (2) the use of the vehicle
after such device or element of design has been removed − Removal of the fan shroud.
or rendered inoperative by any person.
Noise Emission Warranty particular part, component or system of the vehicle

The manufacturer warrants that this vehicle as manufac- manufactured by the manufacturer. Defects in design,
tured by the manufacturer, was designed, built and assembly or in any part, component or system of the
equipped to conform at the time it left the manufacturer’s vehicle as manufactured by the manufacturer, which, at
control with all applicable U.S. EPA Noise Control Regu- the time it left the manufacturer’s control, caused noise
lations. emissions to exceed Federal standards, are covered by
this warranty for the life of the vehicle.
This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built and
equipped by the manufacturer, and is not limited to any
Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log Maintenance Log and Service Chart (Gas Engines) Insert
Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the mileage at which service was performed.
MILES 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000 36,000 42,000 48,000
KILOMETERS 9 600 19 000 29 000 36 000 48 000 58 000 67 000 77 000
Exhaust system-inspect
Air cleaner assembly-inspect
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
MILES 54,000 60,000 66,000 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000

KILOMETERS 87 000 96 000 106 000 116 000 126 000 135 000 145 000 154 000 7
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
Maintenance Log and Service Chart (Diesel Engines)

Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log — Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to
the mileage at which service was performed.
MILES 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500 45,000 52,500 60,000
KILOMETERS 12 000 24 000 36 000 48 000 60 000 72 000 84 000 96 000
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
MILES 67,500 75,000 82,500 90,000 97,500 84,000 105,00 112,500
KILOMETERS 108 000 120 000 132 000 144 000 126 000 156 000 168 000 181 000
ODOMETER READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion The most common causes are:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
• Stone and gravel impact.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on • Insects, tree sap and tar.
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
Washing
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under- • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
body protection. hicle in the shade using Mopart Car Wash or a mild
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with 7
clear water.
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle. • If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopart Super Kleen Bug
What Causes Corrosion?
and Tar Remover to remove.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use Mopart Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
scratch the paint. open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
finish. considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
CAUTION!
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
metal and painted surfaces. sibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
Special Care packaged and sealed.
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
a month.
• Use Mopart touch up paint on scratches as soon as YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the equipped
color of your vehicle. YES Essentialst seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a with a clean, dry towel.
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopart
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a • For tough stains, apply Mopart Total Clean or a mild
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Mopartor equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven
• For grease stains, apply Mopart Multi-purpose
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a 7
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
protective finish.
• Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
tials products.
Interior Care
WARNING!
Use Mopart Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting. Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Use Mopart Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MopartTotal Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular Cleaning Headlights
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
and Mopart Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter- reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not lowed by rinsing.
required to maintain the original condition. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
with Mopart Glass Cleaner or any commercial cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type rag.
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do Seat Belt Maintenance
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are wash them. 7
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue.
FUSES (INTEGRATED POWER MODULE)

An integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains car-
tridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each fuse
and component may be stamped on the inside cover
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on
the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
Integrated Power Module Location

Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
1 20 Amp Power Outlet Console 9 30 Amp Off Road Module
Yellow Pink Power
2 20 Amp Cabin Compartment 10 5 Amp Trx-Off Rd Pkg Sen
Yellow Node (CCN) Door Orange (Gas Engine Only)
Locks NOTE: Insert 5 amp
3 — — fuse in this cavity to
4 15 Amp Aisin Transmission enable the TRX capa-
Blue Controls (Diesel Only) bility (If Equipped).
5 20 Amp Power Sunroof 11 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw
Yellow Yellow (IOD)-Cabin Com-
partment Node
6 10 Amp Vistronic Fan/ (CCN)/Radio/Under 7
Red Wastegate Solenoid Hood Lamp/Wireless
7 — — Control Module
8 10 Amp Heated Mirrors (WCM)/Satellite Digi-
Red tal Audio Receiver
(SDARS)/Hands Free
Module (HFM)/EOM

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
12 30 Amp Electric Brake 20 10 Amp Occupant Restraints
Pink Red Controller (ORC) 2
13 25 Amp Power-Battery 21 10 Amp Occupant Restraints/
Natural RWAL/ABS Module Red Pass Disable Switch
Feed 22 2 Amp IGN Switch Feed
14 15 Amp Park Lamps Left Gray
Blue 23 10 Amp HVAC
15 20 Amp Trailer Park Lamps Red
Yellow 24 20 Amp AISIN Relay Feed
16 15 Amp Park Lamps Right Blue (Diesel Only)
Blue 25 10 Amp Power Mirror/T-Case
17 — — Red Brake
18 40 Amp ABS Pump 26 20 Amp Brake Switch/Center
Green Yellow High Mount Stop
19 30 Amp Trailer Tow Battery Lamp (CHMSL)/
Pink Feed Aftermarket CHMSL

Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
27 40 Amp Power Seats 32 10 Amp Power Ignition Run
Green Red — Adjustable Pedals
28 10 Amp Power Run/Start- LED
Red PCM/Steering Angle 33 10 Amp Power-IGN Run —
Sensor Red HVAC
29 10 Amp 4X4 Switch/Pass Dr 34 — —
Red Switch/EC Mirror 35 15 Amp Cabin Compartment
30 15 Amp Power Run/Start- Blue Node (CCN) Illumi-
Blue ABS/RWAL/Smart nation
Bar/YAW Sensor/ 36 25 Amp Audio_Amplifier
Universal Exhaust Natural
Gas Oxygen (Uego) 7
37 15 Amp Variable Gate Turbo
Sensor Controller Blue (VGT) — Turbo Die-
31 10 Amp PCM (Gas)/TCM sel
Red (Diesel 58RFE) 38 20 Amp Power Outlet IP
Yellow
Cavity Cartridge Mini Description CAUTION!

Fuse Fuse
39 10 Amp Seatbelt Tension • When installing the Integrated Power Module
Red Reducer/Power IGN cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
Run/Acc erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
40 20 Amp Power IGN Run/Acc may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Yellow — Cigar Lighter/Rear Module, and possibly result in a electrical system
Power Point failure.
41 — —
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
42 30 Amp Diesel PCM (Diesel use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
Pink Only)
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
recommend that you take the following steps to mini- possibility of compressor damage when the system is
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery: started again.
• Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw fuse (I.O.D.) fuse NOTE: When reinstalling the IOD fuse push firmly until
located in the Integrated Power Module, located in the fully seated, the gages in the Instrument Cluster will do
engine compartment. The I.O.D. cavity includes a a full sweep, when the ignition key is cycled to RUN. This
snap-in retainer that allows the fuse to be discon- is a normal condition.
nected, without removing it from the fuse block.
NOTE: When the vehicle is shipped from the factory,
• The electronic shift transfer case should be placed in the IOD fuse is in the up, or extracted position. If the
the 4HI mode and kept in this position to minimize the radio, interior lamps, keyless entry, or other features do
battery drain. not work with the key off, check the position of the fuse
(or check to see if the fuse is blown) to ensure that it is 7
• As an alternative to the above steps you may, discon-
fully seated. When the IOD fuse is extracted, the instru-
nect the negative cables from both batteries.
ment cluster, in the odometer window, will display 9NO
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of FUSE
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS BULB REPLACEMENT

Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park and Turn Lights
LIGHT BULBS — Inside Bulb No.
Overhead Console Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TS 212-2 CAUTION!
Dome Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7679
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your dealer for replace- This is a halogen bulb. Avoid touching the glass with
ment instructions. your fingers. Reduced bulb life will result.
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.

Aluminum base bulbs are not approved. 1. Open the hood
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Bulb No.

Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006LL
Headlamp (Halogen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
Side Marker, Park & Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157
Rear License Plate Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157
Rear Cargo Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
Tail & Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1157
2. Remove the two (2) bolts from the front of the head- 3. Remove the plug from the inner fender well and
light housing. remove the nut through the access hole.
7
Front Headlight Housing Bolts Inner Fender Plug
4. Pull the housing out from the fender to allow room to

disconnect the electrical connectors.
NOTE: For easier removal, pull the headlight assembly
straight forward, applying the greatest amount of force to
the outer edge of the headlight assembly.
Rear Headlight Housing Nut Access
Headlight Removal
5. Unlock and pull connector straight from the base of

the headlight halogen bulb.
6. Twist connector on the side marker/turn signal/park
light bulb 1⁄4 turn and remove connector and bulb from
housing.
7. Remove housing from vehicle with headlight halogen
bulb in housing.
8. Twist the headlight halogen bulb 1⁄4 turn and remove
headlight bulb from the housing.
9. Replace headlight or side marker/turn signal/park
Bulb Removal light bulb. Do not touch the headlight halogen bulb.
7
10. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-
ing.
Fog Lights 2. Pull bulb straight from the connector.

1. Reach under the vehicle, unlock and twist connector
counterclockwise 1⁄4 turn and remove connector and bulb
from housing.
3. Reverse procedure for installation of bulbs and hous-

ing.
Cab Top Clearance Lights — If Equipped 2. Rotate the socket 1⁄4 turn and pull it from the light
assembly.
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the light.
7
3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace. FLUID AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Appoximate)
6.7L HO Turbo Diesel
Engine
Standard Rear Tank 52 gal. 197 L
Optional Midship Tank 22 gal. 83L
Fuel (Appoximate)
5.7L Gas Engine
Standard Rear Tank 52 gal. 197L
Optional Midship Tank 22 gal. 83L
U.S. Metric U.S. Metric

Engine Oil (with filter) Cooling System
6.7L HO Turbo Diesel 12 qts. 11.4L 6.7L Diesel Engine I-6 22.6 qts. 21.4L
Engine (SAE 15W-40, API 5.7L Gas Engine (Mopart 18.7 qts. 17.7L
CJ-4 Certified, that meets Antifreeze/Coolant 5
CES 20081 Standards.) Year/100,000 Mile For-
5.7L Gas Engine V-8 (SAE 7.0 qts. 6.6L mula) or equivalent
5W-30, API Certified).
For trucks operating un-
der a gross combined
weight rating greater
than 14,000 lbs.
5.7L Gas Engine V-8 (SAE 7.0 qts. 6.6L
5W-20, API Certified).
7
For trucks operating un-
der a gross combined
weight rating less than
14,000 lbs.
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant Mopart Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
6.7L HO Turbo Diesel Engine Oil Use (SAE 15W-40, API CJ-4 Certified, that meets CES 20081 Standards.)
5.7L Gas Engine Oil (For trucks operating Use SAE 5W-20, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395.
under a gross combined weight rating less
than 14,000 lbs.)
5.7L Gas Engine Oil (For trucks operating Use SAE 5W-30, API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395.
under a gross combined weight rating
greater than 14,000 lbs.)
Engine Oil Filter ( 5.7L Gas Engine ) Mopart Engine Oil Filter, P/N 5281090 or equivalent.
Engine Oil Filter ( 6.7L Diesel Engine ) Mopart Engine Oil Filter, P/N 05083285AA or equivalent.
Engine Fuel Filter ( 6.7L Diesel Engine ) Mopart Fuel Filter, P/N 05183410AA or equivalent. Must meet 7 micron
rating. Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturers filtration
and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life
and reliability.
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts

Crankcase Ventilation Filter ( 6.7L Diesel Mopart CCV Filter, P/N 68001433AA or equivalent.
Engine )
Fuel Selection ( 5.7L Gas Engine ) 89 Octane, (R+M)/2 Method, Mid-Grade Preferred (87 Octane acceptable).
Fuel Selection ( 6.7L Diesel Engine ) Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle.
Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur
Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of
Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid
damage to the emissions control system. For most year-round service, No.
2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide
good performance. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F
or -7°C), or is required to operate at colder-than-normal conditions for
prolonged periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2
diesel fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better protection 7
from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters. This vehicle is fully
compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM
specification D-975.
Spark Plugs (5.7L Engine) REC14MCC4 (Gap 0.043”)
Chassis
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Automatic Transmission Mopart ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
(5 Speed 545RFE)
Automatic Transmission Mopart AS68RC™ Automatic Transmission Fluid
(6 Speed AS68RC)
Transfer Case Mopart ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission Fluid G-56 Mopart ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Clutch Linkage Multipurpose Grease, NLGI Grade 2 E.P. or equivalent.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid (3500) GL-5 SAE 75W-90 Synthetic or equivalent. Limited slip additive is not re-
quired.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid GL-5 SAE 75W-90 Synthetic (MS-9763) or equivalent.
(4500/5500)
Brake Master Cylinder Mopart DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopart ATF+4, Automatic Transmission Fluid.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES N
T
E
N
A
CONTENTS N
C
E
m Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . 480 ▫ Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
S
m Maintenance Schedules — 6.7L Turbo Diesel . . . . 480 m Maintenance Schedule — 5.7L Gas Engine . . . . . 491 C
H
▫ Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 ▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . 494 E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 480 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES — 6.7L TURBO
N
T The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold DIESEL
E type in this section (Section 8) must be done at the times
N or mileages specified to assure the continued proper CAUTION!
A
N functioning of the emission control system. These, and all
C other maintenance services included in this manual, Failure to perform the required maintenance items
E should be done to provide best vehicle performance and may result in damage to the vehicle.
S reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for
C vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty
H areas and very short trip driving. At Each Stop for Fuel
E
D Inspection and service also should be done any time a • Check the engine oil level about 30 minutes after a
U fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
L malfunction is suspected.
E while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
S NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis- accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
8 performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 481 M
A
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if • Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct I
N
required. When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, operation. T
take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel E
At Each Oil Change N
and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will help blade
A
performance. • Change the engine oil filter. N
C
Once a Month • Inspect the exhaust system. E
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Inspect the brake hoses. S
damage. C
• Inspect the U-Joints ( if equipped) and front suspen- H
• Inspect the batteries and clean and tighten the termi- sion components. E
nals as required. D
• Check the automatic transmission fluid level. U
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, transmis- L
• Check the manual transmission fluid level. E
sion and transfer case (if equipped), add as needed. S
• Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
• Check master cylinder reservoir fluid level for indica- 8
tions of brake maintenance. • Lubricate outer tie rod ends (4X4) models only.
• Check Filter Minder™. Replace air cleaner filter • Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (4X4).
element if necessary.
A
I Inspection and service should also be performed anytime and go type driving can increase the frequency of the
N
T a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re- engine oil change. This is the result of more frequent
E ceipts. regeneration of the exhaust aftertreatment system, which
N can decrease the life of the engine oil. Failure to change
A Oil Change Indicator System
N the engine oil per the maintenance schedule can result in
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
C internal engine damage.
E indicator system. This system will alert you when it is
time to change your engine oil by displaying the words For information on resetting the Oil Change Indicator
S “Oil Change Required” on your Electronic Vehicle Infor- message, refer to “Oil Change Required – If Equipped,”
C
H mation Center (EVIC). The engine oil change indicator under “System Status (EVIC Displays)” in the “Electronic
E system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” Section of this
D change interval may fluctuate depending on your per- manual.
U
L sonal driving style. Driving styles such as frequent stop
E
S
8
A
Maintenance Schedule I
N
Miles 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500 T
E
(Kilometers) (12 000) (24 000) (36 000) (48 000) (60 000) N
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30] A
N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X C
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (4X4). X X X X X E
Rotate tires. X X X X X S
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct C
X X X X X H
stowage. E
Lubricate outer tie rod ends. X X X X X D
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X U
L
Change front axle fluid (3500/4500/5500 4X4) (Die- E
X X S
sel Engine only).
Change rear axle fluid (3500 4X4 and 4X2) (Diesel
X X
8
Engine Only)
Change automatic transmission fluid. X
Replace fuel filter element. X X
A
I
N Miles 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500
T (Kilometers) (12 000) (24 000) (36 000) (48 000) (60 000)
E
N [Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30]
A Inspect brake linings. X
N
C Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X
E Inspect fan hub. X
S Inspect damper. X
C Inspect front wheel bearings. X
H
E Inspect drive belt, replace as necessary. X
D
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
Miles 45,000 52,500 60,000 67,500 75,000 N
(Kilometers) (72 000) (84 000) (97 000) (109 000) (121 000) T
E
[Months] [36] [42] [48] [54] [60] N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X A
N
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (4X4). X X X X X C
Rotate tires. X X X X X E
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct S
X X X X X
stowage. C
Lubricate outer tie rod ends. X X X X X H
E
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4). X D
Change front axle fluid (3500/4500/5500 4X4) (Die- U
X X X L
sel Engine only). E
Change rear axle fluid (3500 4X4 and 4X2) (Diesel S
X X X
Engine only) 8
Change rear axle fluid (4500/5500 4X4 and 4X2). X
Change manual transmission fluid. X
A
I
N Miles 45,000 52,500 60,000 67,500 75,000
T (Kilometers) (72 000) (84 000) (97 000) (109 000) (121 000)
E
N [Months] [36] [42] [48] [54] [60]
A Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if
N X
C not replaced at 100,000 miles (160 000 km).
E Inspect drive belt, replace as necessary. X X
S
Replace fuel filter element. X X X
C Inspect brake linings. X X
H Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X X
E
D Inspect fan hub. X
U Inspect damper. X
L
E Inspect front wheel bearings. X
S Replace Crankcase Ventilation Filter (CCV). X
8
A
I
Miles 82,500 90,000 97,500 100,000 105,000 N
(Kilometers) (133 000) (145 000) (157 000) (160 000) (169 000) T
E
[Months] [66] [72] [78] [84] N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X A
N
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (4X4). X X X X C
Rotate tires. X X X X E
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct S
X X X X
stowage. C
Lubricate outer tie rod ends. X X X X H
E
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not replaced at D
X U
60 mos.
L
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X E
Change front axle fluid (3500/4500/5500 4X4) (Die- S
X X
sel Engine only). 8
Change rear axle fluid (3500 4X4 and 4X2) (Diesel
X X
Engine only).
Inspect drive belt, replace as required.* X X
A
I
N Miles 82,500 90,000 97,500 100,000 105,000
T (Kilometers) (133 000) (145 000) (157 000) (160 000) (169 000)
E
N [Months] [66] [72] [78] [84]
A Inspect fan hub. X
N
C Inspect damper. X
E Replace fuel filter element. X X
S Inspect front wheel bearings. X
C Inspect brake linings. X X
H
E Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X X
D
U
L
E
S
8
A
I
Miles 112,500 120,000 127,500 135,000 142,500 150,000 N
(Kilometers) (181 000) (193 000) (205 000) (217 000) (229 000) (241 000) T
E
[Months] [90] [96] [102] [108] [114] [120] N
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X A
N
Lubricate Front Drive Shaft Fitting (4X4). X X X X X X C
Rotate tires. X X X X X X E
Check spare tire for proper pressure and cor- S
X X X X X X
rect stowage. C
Lubricate outer tie rod ends. X X X X X X H
E
Flush and replace engine coolant at 120 D
months, if not replaced at 100,000 miles (161 X U
000 km). L
E
Inspect drive belt, replace as required.* X X X S
Drain and refill transfer case fluid (4X4). X 8
Check transfer case fluid level (4X4). X
Change front axle fluid (3500/4500/5500 4X4)
X X X
( Diesel Engine only).
A
I
N Miles 112,500 120,000 127,500 135,000 142,500 150,000
T (Kilometers) (181 000) (193 000) (205 000) (217 000) (229 000) (241 000)
E
N [Months] [90] [96] [102] [108] [114] [120]
A Change rear axle fluid (3500 4X4 and 4X2)
N X X X
C (Diesel Engine only).
E Change rear axle fluid (4500/5500 4X4 and
X
4X2).
S
C Change automatic transmission fluid. X X
H Change manual transmission fluid. X
E
D Inspect fan hub. X X
U Inspect damper. X X
L
E Replace fuel filter element. X X X
S Inspect front wheel bearings. X X
8 Inspect brake linings. X X
Inspect and adjust parking brake if necessary. X X
Adjust valve lash clearance. X
Replace Crankcase Ventilation Filter (CCV). X
A
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE — 5.7L GAS ENGINE I
N
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re- The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
T
ceipts. time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. E
N
*This maintenance is not required if belt was previously The “Change Oil” message will flash in the instrument A
replaced. cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicat- N
C
ing that an oil change is necessary. E
WARNING!
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change S
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service C
You can be badly injured working on or around a H
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
E
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). D
U
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a NOTE: L
service job, take your vehicle to a competent • The oil change indicator message will not monitor the E
mechanic. time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil S
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even 8
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-
nated.
A
I • Change your engine oil more often if you drive your the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
N
T vehicle off-road for an extended period of time. racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
E level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
N • Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
A exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
N comes first. required.
C
E Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message Once a Month
S after completing the scheduled oil change. If this sched-
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
C uled oil change is performed by someone other than your
H damage.
dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps
E
D described under “Odometer/Trip Odometer” under “In- • Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
U strument Cluster Description” in Section 4 of this as required.
L manual.
E • Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
S At Each Stop for Fuel master cylinder, power steering and transmission and
8 • Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
add as needed.
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
A
At Each Oil Change I
CAUTION! N
• Change the engine oil filter. T
E
Failure to perform the required maintenance items N
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines. may result in damage to the vehicle. A
• Check the Manual Transmission fluid level. N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
A
I Required Maintenance Intervals
N
T Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
E
N are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
A
N Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
C Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. 6,000 10 000 6
E
Rotate Tires. 6,000 10 000 6
S Lubricate outer tie rod ends. 6,000 10 000 6
C Lube Front Drive Shaft Fitting (4x4 only). 6,000 10 000 6
H
E If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty
D or off-road conditions. Inspect the engine air cleaner 12,000 20 000 12
U filter, replace if necessary.
L
E Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. 12,000 20 000 12
S Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using
8 your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent 18,000 30 000 18
trailer towing (Gas Engine Only).
Inspect the CV Joints. Perform the first inspection at
24,000 40 000 24
12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months.
A
I
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage N
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.) T
E
Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months N
A
Inspect Exhaust System. Perform the first inspection at N
24,000 40 000 24
12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12 months. C
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot E
24,000 40 000 24
seals, replace if necessary. S
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. 30,000 50 000 30 C
Inspect the transfer case fluid. 30,000 50 000 30 H
E
Replace the spark plugs on 5.7L engines. 30,000 50 000 30 D
Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter and U
L
change main sump filter and spin-on cooler return E
60,000 100 000 60
filter (if equipped), if using your vehicle for any of the S
following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
8
Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road or fre- 60,000 100 000 60
quent trailer towing.
A
I
N Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
T are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
E
N Maintenance Items Miles Kilometers or Months
A
N Change the manual transmission fluid if using your
C vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow-
E plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service
60,000 100 000 60
(commercial service), off-road, desert operation or
S more then 50% of your driving is at sustained high
C
H speeds during hot weather, above 90F° (32C°).
E Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. 90,000 150 000 90
D
U Flush and replace the engine coolant. 102,000 170 000 60
L Change the automatic transmission fluid & filter and
E change main sump filter and spin-on cooler return 120,000 200 000 120
S
filter (if equipped).
8 Replace Accessory Drive Belt(s). 120,000 200 000 120
A
I
WARNING! N
T
E
You can be badly injured working on or around a N
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which A
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If N
C
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a E
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic. S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
m Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your m Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
m Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
m Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
m If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
m Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 503 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
m Mopart Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 ▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 9
500 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Be Reasonable With Requests

YOUR VEHICLE If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
Prepare For The Appointment
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
At many dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
work to be performed may not be covered by the
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
pointment.
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem. The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
Prepare A List your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident, Warranty service must be done by an authorized
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
service advisor know. that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 501
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to • Vehicle identification number
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
manner.
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
P.O. Box 21–8004
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
this process.
Phone: (800) 992-1997
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
P.O. Box 1621
want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you Phone —(800) 465–2001
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
In Mexico contact:
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Center should include the following information: Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office) Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
9
• Dealership name
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
Impaired (TDD/TTY) tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
Service Contract your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
You may have purchased a service contract for your those documents.
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
concerns.
date. If you have any questions about your service
MOPART PARTS
WARNING!
Mopart fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals vehicle operating at its best.
known to the State of California to cause cancer and REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
this vehicle. individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer. 9
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– To order the following manuals, you may use either the
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Wash- tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
ington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
about motor vehicle safety from http:// for an order form.
www.safercar.gov.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
In Canada: manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
• Service Manuals.
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety These comprehensive service manuals provide the
defect to the Canadian government should write to information that students and professional technicians
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
3V9. Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, dia-
grams, and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals. starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-

cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
safety tips.
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer- Call Toll Free at:
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability • 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
Or
of all tools and equipment.
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
• Owner’s Manuals.
• www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you • www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
9
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
TIRE QUALITY GRADES in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
The following describes the tire grading categories estab- characteristics and climate.
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
Traction Grades
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
of the tires on your car.
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
Requirements in Addition to These Grades. concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
WARNING!
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex- The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends peak traction characteristics.
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
Temperature Grades
WARNING!
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive load-
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and heat buildup and possible tire failure.
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
9
INDEX
10
510 INDEX
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,345 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435,436

Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Air Cleaner, Engine Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181,312
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,414,453 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 19
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,177
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427,428 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237,427 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Air Conditioning System, Zone Control . . . . . . . . 240 Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323,333 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,52 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,175 Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Airbag On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 273,279,446,448
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448,450
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,177 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446,448,449
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446,448,478
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448,451
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Automatic Transmission (Diesel Engine Only) . . . . 446
INDEX 511
Automatic Transmission (Gas Engine Only) . . . . . 448 Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444,478 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425,426 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Blanket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,427 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Cab Top Clearance Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,149
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 474
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Body Builders Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Caps, Filler
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,410
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309,440 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,340 10
512 INDEX
Cassette Tape and Player Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 232 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183,188,196,209,222

Catalyst Full Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 Clutch Linkage Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . 186,194,208 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139,149
Center Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140,150
Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . 157,158 Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Charge Air Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 436
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,60 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,67 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433,434,437
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60,66 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Cleaning Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
INDEX 513
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . 435,476 Disc Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Used Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter . . . . . . . . . . 417
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,161 Driving
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,235,238 Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Diesel Exhaust Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Dual Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336,386
Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . . . 226
Diesel Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Bulk Storage of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,161
Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Dipsticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 132 10
514 INDEX
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 143 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Data Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Emergency, In Case of Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Idling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,476
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,410
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 480 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,410
Emission Related Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Runaway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400,401 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413,414 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256,264,270 Exhaust Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,340,433
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,432,433,452
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
INDEX 515
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Fold Flat Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Filters Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,420,476 Front Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430,443
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,410,476 Front Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Flashers Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,341,345
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,345
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,345,476
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417,420,476
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Fluid Level Checks Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,341
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 System Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 476 Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,179,472 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 10
516 INDEX
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344,402 Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Hazard
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174,262 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 127
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274,279,287 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,113 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,161
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Guide, Body Builders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 127
INDEX 517
Hitches Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Hub Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Intervention Regeneration Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,60 Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172,174 10
518 INDEX
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Lap Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127,175
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,122 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,175 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Anti-Lock Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181,312 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Cap Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . 179 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Transmission Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,175,468
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125,179,472 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 174
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,444
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
INDEX 519
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,364
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384,386 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403,503
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480,491 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Noise Control
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,445 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 10
520 INDEX
Tampering Prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,409

Noise Emission Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451,454 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,410
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,182 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,182 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,282
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276,282
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145,178,482 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,142
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Overhead Travel Information Center . . . . . . . . . . 135
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . 504
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407,409
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406,410,476 Passenger Airbag On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,409 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
INDEX 521
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 PTO (Power Take-Off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 318
Positive Crankcase Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Power Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 436
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186,194,208
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 151 Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222,226
Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,162 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186,194,208
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,428 Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443,444
Take-Off Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Take-Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Rear Window, Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,162
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Pretensioners Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . 370,372 10
522 INDEX
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . 371,374 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222,226
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 230 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,75
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 43
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 145,178 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,71
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,66 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
INDEX 523
Folding Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer Case

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370,372
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer Case
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,374
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,177 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 435,476 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Sliding Rear Window
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,162
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Service Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Soot Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184,188,196,209,222 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420,476
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252,255 10
524 INDEX
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252,256 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256,264 Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . . . 333
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,410
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252,256 System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines) . . . . . . . . . . 255 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,67
Steel Carcass Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Steering Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . 318,333
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,428 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Wheel Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,322,506
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Storage, Behind the Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . 157,158 Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
INDEX 525
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336,386 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278,285
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318,319 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313,322 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85,364
Steel Carcass Ply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 10
526 INDEX
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Transaxle Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Transfer Case Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140,150
Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Vehicle Information Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Transmission Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319,347
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273,279,446,448 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446,448 Video Entertainment System (Rear Seat Video
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252,256,285,445 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174,262
Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,182 Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,175,468 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
INDEX 527
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,431 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Water Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,162
Water Separator, Diesel Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235,238
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,129,431
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,431
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Wheel Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Wheel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384,388
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 YES Essentialst Fabric Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . 459
10
INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION A MESSAGE FROM DAIMLERCHRYSLER CORPORATION - DIESEL ENGINES ONLY HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE
MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key RemovalLocking Doors With The KeySENTRY KEY Replacement KeysCustomer Key ProgrammingGeneral InformationSTEERING
WHEEL LOCK - IF EQUIPPED If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering WheelTo Release The Steering Wheel LockAutomatic Transmission Ignition Interlock SystemSECURITY ALARM SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED Rearming of the SystemTo Set the AlarmTo Disarm the
SystemILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY - IF EQUIPPED To unlock the doorsTo lock the doorsUsing the Panic AlarmGeneral InformationTransmitter Battery Service REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM - IF EQUIPPED DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks - If EquippedPower Door Locks - If EquippedChild Protection Door LockWINDOWS Power Windows - If Equipped Power Sliding Rear Window - If Equipped Sliding Rear Window - If EquippedWind BuffetingOCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Lap/Shoulder Belts
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt AnchorageAutomatic Locking Restraint (ALR) Mode - If EquippedCenter Lap BeltsSeat Belt PretensionersEnhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert) Seat Belts and Pregnant WomenSeat Belt ExtenderDriver And Right Front
Passenger Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)-AirbagEvent Data Recorder (EDR)Child RestraintNEW ENGINE BREAK-IN 5.7L Gas Engine6.7L Diesel EngineSAFETY TIPS Transporting PassengersLock Your VehicleExhaust GasSafety Checks You Should Make Inside
The VehicleSafety Checks You Should Make Outside The VehicleUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside MirrorAutomatic Dimming Mirror - If EquippedOutside MirrorsExterior Mirrors Folding FeatureElectronic Power Mirrors - If Equipped
Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated Sideview Mirrors - If EquippedTrailer Towing Mirrors - If EquippedHANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect) - IF EQUIPPED OperationsPhone Call FeaturesUConnect System FeaturesAdvanced Phone ConnectivityThings
You Should Know About Your UConnect SystemGeneral InformationSEATS 40-20-40 Front Seat Reclining SeatsAdjustable Head RestraintsManual Rotary Lumbar Support Adjustment - If EquippedPower Seats - If EquippedHeated Seats - If EquippedTO OPEN AND CLOSE
THE HOOD LIGHTS Interior Lights Battery SaverHeadlamp DelayHeadlights, Parking Lights, Panel LightsDaytime Running Lights (Canada Only and Fleet Vehicles)Lights-on ReminderFog Lights - If EquippedMultifunction Control LeverWINDSHIELD WIPERS AND
WASHERS Windshield Wipers Windshield WashersTILT STEERING COLUMN DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS - IF EQUIPPED AdjustmentELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL - IF EQUIPPED To ActivateTo Set At A Desired SpeedTo DeactivateTo Resume SpeedTo Vary
The Speed SettingTo Accelerate For PassingOVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH COMPASS/TEMPERATURE MINI-TRIP COMPUTER - IF EQUIPPED US/M Button RESET Button Global ResetStep Button Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO)Distance To Empty (DTE)Trip
Odometer (ODO)Elapsed Time (ET)C/T Button Automatic Compass CalibrationManual Compass CalibrationRecalibrating The CompassOutside TemperatureOVERHEAD CONSOLE WITH ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) - DIESEL ONLY
Dome/Reading LightsElectronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) - If Equipped Compass/Temperature ButtonELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER CUPHOLDERS Front Instrument Panel Cupholders (40-20-40 Seats) - Automatic
TransmissionFront Instrument Panel Cupholders (Bucket Seats) - Automatic TransmissionFront Instrument Panel Cupholders - Manual Transmission Rear Cupholder (Quad Cab) - If EquippedSTORAGE Center Storage Compartment (40-20-40 Seat) - If Equipped Center
Storage Compartment (Bucket Seats) - If Equipped Storage and Seats (Quad Cab Models)Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers REAR WINDOW FEATURES Electric Rear Window Defroster and Heated Side view Mirrors - If EquippedPower Sliding Rear Window - If Equipped
Sliding Rear Window - If EquippedFOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR - IF EQUIPPED UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS INSTRUMENT CLUSTERS 5.7L Gas Engines 6.7L Cummins Diesel Engines INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DESCRIPTION ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK Clock Setting ProcedureRADIO GENERAL INFORMATION Radio Broadcast SignalsTwo Types of SignalsElectrical DisturbancesAM ReceptionFM ReceptionSALES CODE REF - AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC) RADIO WITH
OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - CD ModeOperation Instructions - Auxiliary ModeOperating Instructions - Hands Free Phone - If EquippedOperating Instructions - Satellite
Radio - If EquippedSALES CODE RAQ - AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS FREE PHONE, AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS (VES) CAPABILITIES Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - (CD MODE
for CD Audio Play)LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)Notes On Playing MP3 FilesOperation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio Play)LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)SALES CODE RAK - AM/FM/CASSETTE/CD (6-DISC) RADIO WITH
OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS FREE PHONE, VIDEO, MP3, and WMA CAPABILITIES Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperating Instructions - Tape PlayerSeek ButtonFast Forward (FF)Rewind (RW)Tape EjectScan ButtonChanging Tape DirectionMetal Tape
SelectionPinch Roller ReleaseNoise ReductionOperation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio Play)Notes On Playing MP3 FilesOperation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Audio Play)LOAD/EJECT Button
(CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)SALES CODE REC - AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio (If Equipped)REC Setting the ClockAudio Clock DisplayVIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (SALES CODE XRV)
- IF EQUIPPED SATELLITE RADIO - IF EQUIPPED System ActivationElectronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID)Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, RAQ, and RAK RadiosSelecting a ChannelStoring and Selecting Pre-Set ChannelsUsing the PTY (Program
Type) Button - If EquippedPTY Button SCANPTY Button SEEKSatellite AntennaReception QualityREMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS - IF EQUIPPED Radio OperationTape PlayerCD PlayerCASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE COMPACT DISC
MAINTENANCE RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES CLIMATE CONTROLS Heater Only - If Equipped Air Conditioning and Heating - If Equipped Air Conditioning with Dual Zone Temperature Control - If EquippedOperating TipsOperating Tips Chart STARTING
AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES - GAS ENGINES Manual Transmission - If EquippedAutomatic Transmission - If EquippedNormal StartingIf Engine Fails To StartAfter StartingSTARTING PROCEDURES - DIESEL ENGINES Manual Transmission - If Equipped
Automatic Transmission - If EquippedNormal Starting Procedure - Engine Manifold Air Temperature Above 66 degrees F (19 degrees C)Starting Procedure - Engine Manifold Air Temperature Below 66 degrees F (19 degrees C)Starting FluidsNORMAL OPERATION - DIESEL
ENGINE Cold Weather PrecautionsEngine Idling - In Cold WeatherStopping The EngineEngine Speed ControlOperating PrecautionsCooling System Tips - Automatic TransmissionENGINE BLOCK HEATER (GAS ENGINES)- IF EQUIPPED DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE
(ENGINE BRAKING) - IF EQUIPPED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Automatic Transmission with Overdrive (5 Speed 545RFE) - If EquippedAutomatic Transmission (6 Speed AS68RC) - If EquippedMANUAL TRANSMISSION Manual Transmission - 6 Speed (G56)
Recommended Vehicle Shift SpeedsDownshifting - Gas EngineDownshifting - Diesel EngineFOUR-WHEEL-DRIVE OPERATION - IF EQUIPPED Manually Shifted Transfer Case Operating Information/PrecautionsShifting Procedure - Manually Shifted Transfer Case Transfer
Case Reminder LightElectronically Shifted Transfer Case Operating Information/Precautions (4 Position Switch) - If Equipped Shifting Procedure - Electronically Shifted Transfer Case LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL - IF EQUIPPED POWER TAKE OFF OPERATION - IF
EQUIPPED Stationary ModeMobile ModePower Take Off - Aftermarket InstallationDRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES DRIVING THROUGH WATER Flowing/Rising WaterShallow Standing WaterDRIVING OFF-ROAD PARKING BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM Brake Noise
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake SystemPOWER STEERING TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings Tire Identification Number (TIN)Tire Loading and Tire PressureTIRES - GENERAL INFORMATION Tire PressureTire Inflation PressuresRadial-Ply TiresLimited Use Spare
- If EquippedTire SpinningTread Wear IndicatorsLife of TireReplacement TiresAlignment And BalanceSUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION - IF EQUIPPED TIRE CHAINS SNOW TIRES TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Dual Rear Wheels ENGINE
RUNAWAY FUEL REQUIREMENTS Fuel Requirements (5.7L Gas Engines)Fuel Requirements (6.7L Diesel Engines)ADDING FUEL Adding Fuel (Gas Engines)Adding Fuel (Diesel Engines)VEHICLE LOADING Certification LabelTRAILER TOWING Common Towing
DefinitionsTrailer Hitch ClassificationTrailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)Trailer and Tongue WeightTowing RequirementsTowing TipsTrailer Towing Mirrors - If EquippedSNOWPLOW Before plowingSnowplow Prep Package Model AvailabilityOver the
Road Operation With Snowplow AttachedMethods For Removing Snow Operating TipsGeneral MaintenanceRECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Recreational Towing - 2 Wheel Drive ModelsRecreational Towing - 4 Wheel Drive ModelsWHAT TO DO
IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 3500 Models - If EquippedJACKING INSTRUCTIONS Tire Changing ProcedureHOISTING JUMP-STARTING With Portable Starting UnitFREEING A STUCK VEHICLE EMERGENCY
TOW HOOKS - IF EQUIPPED TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE 4-Wheel- Drive Vehicles2-Wheel- Drive VehiclesMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT - 6.7L DIESEL ENGINE ENGINE COMPARTMENT- 5.7L GAS ENGINE ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM (OBD II) Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageREPLACEMENT PARTS ENGINE DATA PLATE DEALER SERVICE SERVICE INFORMATION MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Engine OilDrive Belts (Gas Engines)Drive Belt (Diesel Engines)Engine Air Cleaner Filter (Gas
Engines)Engine Air Cleaner Filter (Diesel Engines)Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter (Diesel Engines) Engine Fuel Filter (Gas Engines)Spark Plugs (Gas Engines)Catalytic Converter (Gas Engines)Intervention Regeneration Strategy - EVIC Message Process Flow (Catalyst
Full Message) (Diesel Engines Only)Emission-Related Components (Gas Engines)Maintenance Free Battery (Gas Engines)Maintenance Free Batteries (Diesel Engines)Air Conditioner MaintenancePower Steering - Fluid CheckFront Suspension Ball JointsSteering Linkage
- InspectionFront Prop Shaft LubricationFront Axle Universal Drive Joints And Ball JointsBody LubricationWindshield Wiper BladesWindshield WashersExhaust SystemCooling SystemFanCharge Air Cooler - Inter-Cooler (Diesel Engines)Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Fuel System ConnectionsBrake SystemClutch Hydraulic SystemClutch LinkageRear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid LevelTransfer Case - If EquippedManual Transmission - If EquippedAutomatic Transmission (Gas Engine Only)Automatic Transmission (Diesel Engine
Only)Front and Rear Wheel BearingsNoise Control System Required Maintenance and WarrantyAppearance Care and Protection from CorrosionFUSES (INTEGRATED POWER MODULE) VEHICLE STORAGE REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlight (Halogen)/Front Park and Turn LightsFog LightsCab Top Clearance Lights - If EquippedFLUID AND CAPACITIES FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS EngineChassisMAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES - 6.7L TURBO DIESEL Oil Change Indicator SystemMaintenance ScheduleMAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - 5.7L GAS ENGINE Required Maintenance IntervalsIF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING
SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The AppointmentPrepare A ListBe Reasonable With RequestsIF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) MOPAR PARTS REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In CanadaPUBLICATION ORDER
FORMS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES TreadwearTraction GradesTemperature GradesINDEX

2008 RamChassis 1st

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 RamChassis 1st

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2008 RamChassis 1st

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE

INTRODUCTION A MESSAGE FROM DAIMLERCHRYSLER

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.

Vehicle Identification Number

▫ Driver And Right Front Passenger Supplemental m Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal

Ignition Switch Positions

An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

• Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or

General Information If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering

Automatic Transmission Ignition Interlock System Rearming of the System:

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED To unlock the doors:

Using the Panic Alarm General Information

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

• Any engine warning lamps come on Manual Door Locks — If Equipped

• For personal security and safety in the event of an

Child Protection Door Lock Location

Child Lock Control

NOTE: After setting the child protection door lock

Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving

Auto Down (Driver’s Side Only)

Power Sliding Rear Window – If Equipped Sliding Rear Window – If Equipped

normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

• If the black latch and black buckle are not prop-

Inserting Latch Plate In Use Position

If the black latch and buckle are not connected when

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Center Lap Belts

Seat Belt Pretensioners Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System

Seat Belts and Pregnant Women

These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument • Crash Sensor

because the infant has a medical condition which

Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another colli-

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer or any engine NOTE:

• Airbag deployment level (if applicable) Child Restraint

of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant

• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who

NOTE: For children riding in the front seat of a Stan-

Standard Cab Passenger Seat

Quad Cab Rear Outboard Seats

Child Restraint Tether Anchor

Tether Anchorage Points at the Right and Center

Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab

Tether Anchorage Points at All Three Seating

Children Too Large for Booster Seats NEW ENGINE BREAK-IN

NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS 6.7L Diesel Engine

• Check the coolant and oil levels frequently. SAFETY TIPS

Lock Your Vehicle • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Airbag Light

Lights Fluid Leaks

m Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ▫ Daytime Running Lights

▫ Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

▫ Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125